• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Tantra
  • Tantra Collection
  • Action tantras
  • Toh 543

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh543.pdf

འཇམ་དཔལ་གྱི་རྩ་བའི་རྒྱུད།

The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī
Chapter 54

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa
འཕགས་པ་འཇམ་དཔལ་གྱི་རྩ་བའི་རྒྱུད།
’phags pa ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud
The Noble Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī
Ārya­mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa

Toh 543

Degé Kangyur, vol. 88 (rgyud ’bum, na), folios 88.a–334.a (in 1737 par phud printing), 105.a–351.a (in later printings)

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Kumārakalaśa
  • Śākya Lodrö

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2020

Current version v 1.21.34 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 1.31pm on Tuesday, 4th February 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh543.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 37 chapters- 37 chapters
1. Chapter 1
2. Chapter 2
3. Chapter 3
4. Chapter 4
5. Chapter 5
6. Chapter 6
7. Chapter 7
8. Chapter 8
9. Chapter 9
10. Chapter 10
11. Chapter 11
12. Chapter 12
13. Chapter 13
14. Chapter 14
15. Chapter 15
16. Chapter 16
17. Chapter 17
24. Chapter 24
25. Chapter 25
26. Chapter 26
27. Chapter 27
28. Chapter 28
29. Chapter 29
30. Chapter 30
31. Chapter 31
32. Chapter 32
33. Chapter 33
34. Chapter 34
35. Chapter 35
36. Chapter 36
37. Chapter 37
38. Chapter 38
50. Chapter 50
51. Chapter 51
52. Chapter 52
53. Chapter 53
54. Chapter 54
c. Colophon
ap. Sanskrit Text
+ 37 chapters- 37 chapters
app. Introduction to the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa
ap1. Chapter A1
ap2. Chapter A2
ap3. Chapter A3
ap4. Chapter A4
ap5. Chapter A5
ap6. Chapter A6
ap7. Chapter A7
ap8. Chapter A8
ap9. Chapter A9
ap10. Chapter A10
ap11. Chapter A11
ap12. Chapter A12
ap13. Chapter A13
ap14. Chapter A14
ap15. Chapter A15
ap16. Chapter A16
ap17. Chapter A17
ap24. Chapter A24
ap25. Chapter A25
ap26. Chapter A26
ap27. Chapter A27
ap28. Chapter A28
ap29. Chapter A29
ap30. Chapter A30
ap31. Chapter A31
ap32. Chapter A32
ap33. Chapter A33
ap34. Chapter A34
ap35. Chapter A35
ap36. Chapter A36
ap37. Chapter A37
ap38. Chapter A38
ap50. Chapter A50
ap51. Chapter A51
ap52. Chapter A52
ap53. Chapter A53
ap54. Chapter A54
ab. Abbreviations
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· Abbreviations Used in the Introduction and Translation
· Abbreviations Used in the Appendix‍—Sources for the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa (MMK)
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· Source Texts (Sanskrit)
· Source Texts (Tibetan)
· Secondary Sources
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa is the largest and most important single text devoted to Mañjuśrī, the bodhisattva of wisdom. A revealed scripture, it is, by its own classification, both a Mahāyāna sūtra and a Mantrayāna kalpa (manual of rites). Because of its ritual content, it was later classified as a Kriyā tantra and assigned, based on the hierarchy of its deities, to the Tathāgata subdivision of this class. The Sanskrit text as we know it today was probably compiled throughout the eighth century ᴄᴇ and several centuries thereafter. What makes this text special is that, unlike most other Kriyā tantras, it not only describes the ritual procedures, but also explains them in terms of general Buddhist philosophy, Mahāyāna ethics, and the esoteric principles of the early Mantrayāna (later called Vajrayāna), with an emphasis on their soteriological aims.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This translation was produced by the Dharmachakra Translation Committee under the supervision of Chökyi Nyima Rinpoche. Wiesiek Mical translated the text from the Sanskrit manuscripts, prepared the Sanskrit edition, and wrote the introduction. Paul Thomas, Ryan Damron, Anna Zilman, Bruno Galasek, and Adam Krug then compared the translation draft against the Tibetan text found in the Degé and other editions of the Tibetan Kangyur. Wiesiek Mical then completed the translation by incorporating all the significant variations from the Tibetan translation either into the English translation itself or the annotations.

The translation was completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­2

The generous sponsorship of 中國宗薩寺堪布彭措郎加, which helped make the work on this translation possible, is most gratefully acknowledged.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa (henceforth MMK) is a scripture devoted to Mañjuśrī, the bodhisattva of wisdom. It is a vaipulya sūtra‍—only a few large sūtras can claim this title‍—that was later classified as a tantra of the Kriyā class. Reflecting its status as a sūtra, the chapter colophons found in the MMK variously identify the work as a Mahāyāna sūtra, a bodhisattvapiṭaka (bodhisattva basket),1 and bodhisattvapaṭalavisara (full bodhisattva collection). The phrase “bodhisattva basket” is significant as it implies that the MMK is part of the Bodhisattva Basket, in contradistinction to the Śrāvaka Basket in the binary classification made by Asaṅga in the Abhidharmasamuccaya. While the Tibetan translations of the MMK refer to it as a “tantra,” the Sanskrit text refers to itself as a kalpa (“manual of rites”), a kalparāja (“king of rites”), and a mantratantra (“mantra treatise”). The term mantratantra, used throughout the MMK to refer to its own content and to tantric teachings in general, could also be understood as “mantra systems/methods,” or the “art of mantras.”


Text Body

The Translation
The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī

1.

Chapter 1

[F.88.a] [F.105.a]8


1.­1

Oṁ, homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas!


Thus did I hear at one time. Lord Śākyamuni dwelt above the Pure Abode, in an inconceivable, wondrous pavilion, circular in shape, with a congregation of bodhisattvas9 distributed all around, located in the canopy of the sky. There the Lord addressed the gods of the Pure Abode: {1.1}

1.­2

“Honored gods! Listen as I tell of the inconceivable, wondrous miracles of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, bodhisattva, and great being‍—listen as I tell of his conduct, different types of samādhi, and magical power; his liberation, maṇḍala, and his miraculous bodhisattva manifestations; and how he is the sustenance for all beings and brings them life, health, and sovereignty! I will explain, for the benefit of all beings, the mantra subjects that completely fulfill one’s wishes. Listen well and duly reflect upon it‍—I will now tell you about him.” {1.2}


2.

Chapter 2

2.­1

Now Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, gazing at this entire assembly, [F.109.a] [F.126.a] entered the samādhi called the gaze that causes all sentient beings to take up the samaya pledge. As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, a ray of light issued from his navel. Along with many hundreds of thousands of millions of other rays, it entirely illuminated all the realms of sentient beings and, reflecting back onto the realm of the Pure Abode, suffused it with light. {2.1}


3.

Chapter 3

3.­1

Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, again looked at the realm of the Pure Abode and, bowing to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas gathered together in that great assembly, pronounced the most secret single-syllable mantra, which removes all poisons and can be employed in all rites the mantra that is effective in the practices of his maṇḍala and which can also be used in all minor ritual activities. What is that mantra? {3.1}

3.­2

“Homage to all the buddhas! This mantra is:


4.

Chapter 4

4.­1

Homage to the Buddha and all buddhas and bodhisattvas!528

Mañjuśrī then looked at the entire realm of the Pure Abode and again directed his gaze at the great assembly gathered there. Prostrating at the feet of Śākyamuni, he smiled and said this to the Blessed One: {4.1}

4.­2

“It is good fortune, O Blessed One, that there is a painting procedure, intended for the benefit of all beings, from the extensive chapters that produce a rain of desired results falling down from the Cloud of Dharma that arises from the accomplishment of sādhana methods of mantra practice. This procedure generates a vast amount of merit and creates the seed of perfect awakening; it also brings complete omniscience.529 {4.2}


5.

Chapter 5

5.­1

Now, Lord Śākyamuni, looking at the entire assembly, spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, yet another procedure from your ritual of cloth painting‍—the medium one. I will teach it now, so listen well and duly reflect upon it. {5.1}

5.­2

“First, to produce the medium painting, thread should be used as previously described, following the same procedure as before. The work should be done by craftsmen who have been trained beforehand, applying the same measurements as the previous cloth. Just as before, the cloth should be of excellent quality, white, tightly woven, and thoroughly clean604 and have fringe tassels.605 The painting should then be executed using uncontaminated paints free of hairs, dust, or other debris, with everything done just as before, except for the sizes and forms of the painted figures. {5.2}


6.

Chapter 6

6.­1

Now, Lord Śākyamuni again addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, yet another secret611 cloth-painting procedure,612 a third type, referred to as ‘smallest,’613 by the means of which all beings can effortlessly win accomplishment. {6.1}

6.­2

“Following the procedures as previously described, skilled craftsmen should prepare a cloth one width of the Buddha’s hand across that is in the same four-sided shape as before. The painting should then be done with the paints as previously described. {6.2}


7.

Chapter 7

7.­1

Now Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, circumambulated Lord Śākyamuni three times clockwise and, having prostrated at his feet, said this to the Blessed One:

“Good! It is good that you, the blessed one, the tathāgata, the worthy one, the perfectly awakened one, gave this Dharma discourse in such a clear way for the benefit, the welfare, and the happiness of all who observe their vidyā vows and in order to show your compassion for the world. You exemplified the bodhisattvas’ skill in means with this particular method that takes them higher than nirvāṇa623 [F.140.a] [F.157.a] and, with their continuous dedication to the goal of awakening,624 accomplishes their conduct consistent with all the goals of the mantras. This will promote the spread of this625 secret mantra among all people. {7.1}


8.

Chapter 8

8.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“The full topic of the cloth-painting procedure, Mañjuśrī, has now been taught by me for the benefit of those beings you foretold. They will succeed even with little skillful means.664 For their benefit I will now teach a sādhana method classified according to the type of activity, describing at length its different virtues. Listen to it well, [F.143.a] [F.160.a] and reflect upon it thoroughly. I will speak for the benefit of all beings.”665 {8.1}


9.

Chapter 9

9.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni addressed the hosts of gods who were sitting among the entire assembly:

“Esteemed friends! Please listen to my discourse about the method for accomplishing the conduct, maṇḍala, and mantra of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Hear this great vidyārāja‍—the supremely secret and sublime heart mantra that was taught by all the tathāgatas for the sake of protecting the practitioner‍—by the uttering of which all mantras are uttered. {9.1}


10.

Chapter 10

10.­1

At that time Lord Śākyamuni taught yet another supreme ritual practice:

“Having chosen another mantra from this king of manuals, one should go down to [the bank of] the great river Gaṅgā. Staying in a boat in the middle of the river, one should incant rice gruel mixed with milk three million times on the days of one’s choice. Subsequently, at the end of recitation, one will perceive all the nāgas. One should then start the main practice. For that, one should prepare, in the middle of the boat, a fire pit in the shape of a lotus. One should prepare a big offering of ironwood blossoms to the painting. The painting of the superior type should be positioned facing west, with oneself sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass facing east. One should incant each of the ironwood blossoms seven times and offer it into the blazing fire of cutch tree sticks. One should do this until one has offered thirty thousand such blossoms, each smeared with white sandalwood and saffron paste. One should use nothing else. One should wait for the nāgas to appear.717 They will be enticed by the power substances, but will not take them. {10.1}


11.

Chapter 11

11.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your ritual, a painting procedure of the medium type, a practice procedure serving as the means for accomplishing middling rites. I will teach it in brief, so please listen carefully and reflect upon it well. I will teach it now.” {11.1}

11.­2

Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, for his part, said this to the Blessed One:

“May the Blessed One, the teacher, full of compassion for the world and delighting in benefiting all beings, speak! Please speak, if you think that the time is right, out of compassion for us and regard for future generations.” {11.2}


12.

Chapter 12

12.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni again looked at the entire Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to [the instructions] for the followers of your vidyā mantra who strive to benefit all beings‍—what mantras956 they should be made to recite, by whom these mantras are to be recited, and the attendant rosary rites that are methods for accomplishing all the common mantras of all tantras. Listen carefully and reflect on this well. I will teach this [now].” {12.1}


13.

Chapter 13

13.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni again looked at the realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, O Mañjuśrī, a ritual sequence for a special worship of [the god of] fire, which is meant for those practitioners of vidyā who engage in the rite of homa according to the special procedure that has been succinctly explained in the chapter on mantras in your manual. Once established in this routine, beings become actively engage in the conduct of all vidyās. What is this sequence? The mantric words of the secret vidyā spell are as follows: {13.1} [F.169.b] [F.186.b]


14.

Chapter 14

14.­1

Then Lord Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, O Mañjuśrī, a secret vidyā mantra of yours that accomplishes all mantras. It was granted by the tathāgatas, arose from the treasury of their teachings, belongs to the ‘Cloud of Dharma,’ and is of the essence of the sky. This vidyā is the supreme lord of all mundane and supramundane mantras, just like the divine youth is the lord of all beings. This lord is described as a tathāgata, the supreme and the most excellent. Just as Lord Buddha, O divine youth, is the most eminent person among gods and men, so he‍—this supreme vidyārāja‍—is among all the mantras. He has been formerly taught by the blessed buddhas who are equal in number to the grains of sand in the river Gaṅgā and whose merits are ineffable. He has been regarded by them as the supremely secret heart mantra [F.172.b] [F.189.b] of the tathāgata Ratnaketu, auspicious in every respect. He is praised and extolled by all the buddhas, is the relief of all beings, and is the destroyer of every evil. He grants every wish and fulfills every hope. So what is this mantra?”1021 {14.1}


15.

Chapter 15

15.­1

At that time, the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi, the great being, was present in the midst of the same gathering. Seated, he rose from his seat, circumambulated the Blessed One clockwise three times, and, prostrating at the Blessed One’s feet, said this to him: {15.1}

15.­2

“Good, O Blessed One! For the sake of those who follow the conduct entailing the ritual divisions of vidyā and homa rites performed at the junctions of the day, you have clearly explained and elucidated with supreme eloquence the path that consists of rites involving vidyā mantras; the path that manifested from the great Cloud of Dharma; the path that comprises the detailed ritual instructions pertaining to the cakravartin, the great vidyārāja who is the heart essence of all the tathāgatas; the path that brings results and fulfills all aims completely; the unsurpassable path that leads to awakening; the path marked with the cause that generates the conditions, actions, and their certain results; the path that is the root of virtue that causes the attainment of the ten miraculous powers, and whose ultimate goal is to ascend to the seat of awakening. That, Blessed One, is excellent! May the teacher please instruct us on the signs that accord with the accomplishment of mantra that appear in dreams, signs indicating the time1123 when the beings who engage in the practice of all vidyā mantras should commence the activities that cause accomplishment, so that all vidyā mantras‍—the causes that fulfill the rites‍—bear results.” {15.2}


16.

Chapter 16

16.­1

The blessed Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Mañjuśrī! Requested by the wise king of yakṣas who holds a vajra in his hand, I already taught in detail, in the middle of this assembly, your complete chapter1295 on the ritual activities intended for all purposes.1296 {16.1}

16.­2
“I taught about the good and bad aspects of dreams
And how they relate to all the mantra purposes.
I taught all of it at length
For the mantra reciters.”1297 {16.2}

17.

Chapter 17

17.­1

Now Lord Śākyamuni entered the samādhi called the magical display of all the tathāgatas. As soon as he entered this samādhi, rays of blue, yellow, dazzling white, red, and crystal-colored light issued from the tuft of hair between his eyebrows. They brightened the entire buddhafield and illuminated the interior of every realm of the universe, while darkening all the planets and constellations and summoning them in an instant. After summoning them, the light assigned them to their respective places and drew them, by the power of the Buddha’s blessing, into the circle of the assembly. It then disappeared into the same tuft of hair between Lord Śākyamuni’s eyebrows. All the planets, constellations, and stars, their light blocked, approached Lord Śākyamuni, pained and frightened. They stood with folded hands, trembling and prostrating themselves on the ground again and again. {17.1}


24.

Chapter 24

24.­1

1359The blessed Śākyamuni now addressed all the most important grahas among the constellations, planets, stars, and celestial bodies that exist in all the world spheres‍—the grahas dwelling in all the directions and endowed with great magical powers: {24.1} [F.194.a] [F.211.a]

24.­2

“Listen, venerable friends, to my presentation on the respective powers of all the planets and constellations. Show your power, sirs, and accomplish the purpose of all the rituals involving the mantra. Keep your samayas and eagerly pursue an accomplishment in the doctrine contained in this sovereign manual of Mañjughoṣa and later expounded in other manuals as well.” {24.2}


25.

Chapter 25

25.­1

Lord Śākyamuni once again addressed the planets, the nakṣatras, the stars, and other celestial bodies: {25.1}

25.­2

“Please listen, all of you, venerable sirs, the planets and the nakṣatras!1487 This sovereign manual of the divine youth Mañjuśrī, which contains ritual instructions on the empowerment and the maṇḍala according to the mantra system,1488 should not be transgressed against. You honored celestial bodies should not obstruct the knowledge holders trained in this supreme manual who engage in the practice of recitation, homa,1489 the observance of rules, and magic. [F.203.b] [F.220.b] Nor should you hinder the insights gained by the calculations of the behavior (carita) of the asterisms and nakṣatras.1490 Instead, you and the hosts of gods should all protect those who engage in the instructions thereof. All the wicked beings should be warded off, restrained,1491 and properly instructed. None of them should be hurt in any way. [Instead,] they should be established in the stages of this doctrine that confers the ten powers.” {25.2}


26.

Chapter 26

26.­1

At that time Blessed Śākyamuni, looking again1521 at the realm of the Pure Abode, addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to my short teaching on the painting procedure of One Syllable‍—the cakravartin of great power. This procedure was previously taught at length, but now only briefly.1522 {26.1}

26.­2

“During this lowest eon beings have little diligence or wisdom, and are rather dull. They would be unable to successfully execute the painting in its extensive version.1523 {26.2}


27.

Chapter 27

27.­1

At that time, the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and the hosts of gods dwelling there, as well as all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyeka­buddhas, and the noble śrāvakas, and once again addressed Mañjuśrī the divine youth: {27.1}

27.­2

“This complete basket of teachings of all the tathāgatas, O Mañjuśrī, is as illustrious as a wish-fulfilling gem. It is taught in order to make beings into receptacles wherein results will be born.1616 During the lowest eon, at the time when the buddhafield is empty, [F.215.a] [F.232.a] the tathāgatas are in the state of nirvāṇa and the genuine Dharma tools have disappeared. At such a time, in order to preserve the mantra basket of all the tathāgatas’ teachings, this One Syllable, O Mañjuśrī, taught in this king of manuals of your mantra methods, the manual of the divine youth, will become a shared treasure, which, when recited according to procedure, will fulfill the wishes of all beings.1617 This cakravartin, One Syllable, taught in your king of manuals, constitutes the essential core of the mantra systems of all the tathāgatas and is the most prominent [part of] them. When one recites him, all the tathāgata-vidyārājas1618 are being recited. {27.2}


28.

Chapter 28

28.­1

Now the blessed Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your ritual a painting procedure‍—a sādhana aid that accomplishes all activities. The ritual performed in front of this painting1685 should employ the aforementioned one-syllable heart mantra, or the six-syllable mantra that ends with ma, or your six-syllable root mantra that starts with oṁ, or the one-syllable mantra.1686 This king of rites will become the means of protection in the future time, when I, the Tathāgata, am in parinirvāṇa and the buddhafield is empty‍—at the time when the lowest eon has arrived, and the world is without protection or refuge, and with nothing to resort to. This king of rites will then become the refuge, the succor, the place of rest, and the final resort. What is this rite? {28.1}


29.

Chapter 29

29.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {29.1}

29.­2

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in this division of your ritual prescriptions, a seventh [set of] rites involving a painting that will be effective at the end of the [dark] eon and will without fail lead to accomplishment. This accomplishment will include the arising and maturing of happiness, the knowledge of the physical world, and the forestalling of all painful destinies, and it will certainly lead to awakening.” {29.2}


30.

Chapter 30

30.­1

At that time, the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {30.1} [F.231.a] [F.248.a]

30.­2

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your mantra treatise, a list of places for accomplishing any vidyārāja mantra, starting with the mantra of Cakravartin‍—the foremost among all tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas.1804 In brief, everywhere in the northern regions, the mantras of tathāgata-1805vidyārājas will become accomplished. {30.2}


31.

Chapter 31

31.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and said to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen Mañjuśrī, divine youth, as I teach about the ways of spirits who possess other beings, and the accompanying auspicious and inauspicious signs.” {31.1}

31.­2

Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, prostrated at the feet of the Blessed One, folded his hands, and said to the Blessed One:


32.

Chapter 32

32.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth: {32.1}

32.­2

“Your mantras, Mañjuśrī, hold the key to the complete understanding of all the tantras; they possess the secrets of all the vidyās,1877 and, in consequence, they can also cause the ripening of all the results of good qualities accumulated over a long period of time. I will now authoritatively teach the factors of accomplishment, which are as follows: {32.2}


33.

Chapter 33

33.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {33.1}

33.­2

“Your king of manuals, Mañjuśrī, styled as a nirdeśa,1899 is a treasury of the sphere of phenomena, as it proceeds from the sphere of phenomena, which is the essence of the tathāgatas. This great sūtra, precious as a jewel, is divided into detailed sections. It is sanctioned [to teach] the greatest secrets of the tathāgatas and brings accomplishment of the supreme mantras. It contains auxiliary practices pertaining to the knowledge of signs and the rules for ascertaining the right time.1900 [It also explains] the voices of all the [different] beings, differentiating the sounds made by sentient and insentient entities. {33.2}


34.

Chapter 34

34.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to the divine youth Mañjuśrī as follows: {34.1}

34.­2

“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to your most esoteric and secret teaching on your mudrās and mantras. No followers of your mantra path should ever disclose this teaching to people who have no trust and no faith in the doctrine of the Tathāgata; to people who do not have the authorizing samaya or do not maintain the continuity of the lineage of the Three Jewels; to people who are in bad company; to people who do not desire religious merit; to people who interact and mix with evil companions or are surrounded by bad friends; to people who distance themselves from the Buddha’s teaching; to people who have not been instructed by their master and so this manual would bring no results for them; to people, divine youth, who have not been initiated into your supreme and most secret maṇḍala; or to people who do not observe their samaya or who have no connection to the family of the Tathāgata. {34.2}


35.

Chapter 35

35.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode [F.245.a] [F.262.a] and entered the samādhi called that which animates the great receptacle of mudrās of the tathāgatas. As soon as he entered this samādhi, a great light issued from the tuft of hair between his eyebrows. This mass of light, surrounded by innumerable billions of light rays, illuminated many buddhafields, arousing all the buddhas [dwelling there], and entered back into Lord Śākyamuni’s tuft of hair. {35.1}


36.

Chapter 36

36.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“There is, Mañjuśrī, a most secret mudrā presentation that includes your root2238 mudrā and its assorted mudrās. [These mudrās] may be employed in all rites. In short, they bring every kind of good fortune and produce results; they supplement every mantra and accomplish the aim of every activity. {36.1}


37.

Chapter 37

37.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {37.1}

37.­2

“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your root manual, another most secret mudrā. Its ritual procedure [represents] the entire mudrā system. [F.259.b] [F.276.b] It is recommended for all the mantras and can be employed with any of them. It accomplishes all rites and purifies the path to perfect awakening.2254 It destroys all the paths that lead to saṃsāric existence. It sustains all beings and grants long life, freedom from disease, and powerful sense faculties. It fulfills all wishes and gives rise to all the factors of awakening. It gives joy to all beings and produces the results they all wish and hope for. It fulfills all activities and makes all mantras efficacious. It comprises all the other mudrās and mantras. Listen, Mañjuśrī, divine youth! {37.2}


38.

Chapter 38

38.­1

At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:

“Listen, Mañjuśrī!

“Briefly, there are detailed [teachings on] the characteristics of the mudrās and the mantras, the procedures of the maṇḍalas and the association-based2456 distribution of mudrās therein, and the secret maṇḍala of all the mantra [deities] in all the tantras.2457 {38.1}

38.­2
“All of them were taught before
By every buddha of great majesty.
The exalted function of the mantras
Was explained for each of the families2458
By the former buddhas from the earliest time
To bring benefit to sentient beings. {38.2}

50.

Chapter 50

50.­1

2485At that time Blessed Vajrapāṇi, the general of the yakṣas who was in the assembly, got up from his seat, draped his upper robe over the left shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, bowed2486 to the Blessed One with his palms pressed together, and made the following request: {50.1}

50.­2

“O Blessed One! You have not fully explained2487 the ritual of the lord of wrath called Yamāntaka that was taught by Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Nor has Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, explained it. I request you, Blessed One, to teach this ritual, out of regard for human beings during the final age, so that, at the time when you are in the state of complete nirvāṇa, when the teachings have disappeared, during the dreadful time of the worst age when the buddhafield is completely devoid of śrāvakas and pratyeka­buddhas, the teachings of the tathāgatas may be preserved, the domain of the Dharma may remain for a long time, all wicked kings may be subdued, those who harm the Three Jewels may be suppressed, the inconceivable bodhisattva conduct may bring the virtues of beings who require guidance to completion, and innumerable sentient beings may be brought to complete maturity. {50.2}


51.

Chapter 51

51.­1

At that time Vajrapāṇi, the lord of guhyakas, looked at the entire great assembly and addressed all the hosts of beings seated [in the space] above the realm of the Pure Abode: {51.1}

51.­2

“Listen, honorable friends! For a start I will teach the painting procedure of Lord of Wrath Yamāntaka‍—one of infinite power and courage, the tamer of those difficult to tame, one who terminates the life of Vaivasvata,2540 a great bodhisattva devoted to restraining wicked beings‍—the procedure that was taught by Mañjuśrī.2541 {51.2}


52.

Chapter 52

52.­1

At that time the great being, Bodhisattva Śāntamati, who was sitting in the midst of that great gathering, got up from his seat, bowed to each of the buddhas, and stood in the middle of the assembly. Having circumambulated the blessed Śākyamuni three times clockwise, he bowed at his feet and, looking in the direction of Vajrapāṇi, the great general of the yakṣa army, said: {52.1}

52.­2

“You are exceedingly cruel,2605 Vajrapāṇi, in that you teach mantra methods that are harmful to all sentient beings, or serve to obtain sensual pleasures. It is not proper, O son of the victorious ones, for the bodhisattvas, the great beings, to act like this because bodhisattvas, great beings, are endowed with great compassion and practice bodhisattva conduct. Practicing benevolence for the sake of all beings, they do not cast off the fetters of existence.2606 {52.2}


53.

Chapter 53

53.­1

Blessed Śākyamuni, having now emerged from his samādhi,2758 continued to teach the Dharma to the assembly that resembled a great ocean. There, sitting in front of all the [assembled] beings and hosts of spirits, were uncountable thousands of bodhisattvas, headed by Vajrapāṇi; uncountable thousands of arhats, headed by Śāriputra; innumerable gods devoted to the four great kings, headed by Vaiśravaṇa; innumerable gods from the realm of the Thirty-Three, headed by Śakra; as well as innumerable gods from the realms of Suyāma, Tuṣita, Nirmāṇarati, Paranirmita, Vaśavartin, Brahmakāyika, Brahmapurohita, Mahābrahmā, Parīttābha, Apramāṇa, Ābhāsvara, and so forth, until Puṇyaprasava, Bṛhatphala, Avṛha, Atapas, and Akaniṣṭha. The Blessed One addressed them as follows: {53.1}


54.

Chapter 54

54.­1

Directing his gaze again at the realm of the Pure Abode, the blessed Śākyamuni said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth: {54.1}

54.­2

“Wherever, Mañjuśrī, this Dharma discourse is disseminated, you should know that I am present there myself, surrounded by the hosts of all the bodhisattvas, taking the place of honor among the congregation of śrāvakas, and attended upon by a retinue of all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, garuḍas, gandharvas, kinnaras, mahoragas, siddhas, vidyādharas, and other nonhuman and human beings. The Tathāgata resides there for the sake of protecting, sheltering, and defending. {54.2}

54.­3

“One should know, Mañjuśrī, divine youth, about the ten advantages obtained in any place where this Dharma treasury of the tathāgatas is written down in the form of a book, read aloud, [F.327.b] [F.344.b] memorized, or respectfully and sincerely worshiped with various implements such as yak-tail whisks, streamers, parasols, banners, flags, bells, music, garlands, scented oils, incense, or pleasant fragrances. These ten advantages are obtained in any place where this Dharma treasury is revered, reflected upon, or focused upon with an undivided mind. What are these ten? {54.3}3311

54.­4

“There will be (1) no danger in that [place] of military invasions or hunger; (2) no pestilence caused by Mahāmārī or other dangers from nonhuman beings; (3) no danger of fire or anything untoward; (4) no danger of drought or excessive rains; (5) no danger of hurricanes, tornadoes, or kravyādas; (6) no danger from Śakra or any rogues or robbers; (7) no danger of untimely death or fear caused by King Yama; (8) no danger from asuras or any gods, nāgas, yakṣas, or gandharvas; (9) no danger from mantras, venoms, or poisons; and (10) no danger of disease, fever, dysentery, indigestion, or other danger to body or limb.3312 One should know that these ten benefits occur wherever this Dharma treasury of the tathāgatas, contained in this great extensive manual, is kept in the form of a book. [F.328.a] [F.345.a] Let us therefore write it down, read it aloud, worship it, memorize it, and rehearse it.3313 {54.4}

54.­5

“This Dharma treasury of the tathāgatas is extremely occult, as it depends in every respect on the mantras.3314 It must not be taught to those who have not received the samaya from the master3315 or those who do not understand the samaya. Why is this? This is because it is secret; it is an occult teaching. It is a teaching [arising from] omniscience. No beings should ever reject or take it lightly.3316 {54.5}

54.­6

“If [those who received it] do not worship [this Dharma treasury] and treat it with respect, they will incur a lot of negativity. One must not disclose it to others, as they could commit negative acts, such as suppressing the secret [practices], killing sentient beings, reporting [you] to the king, shortening lives, or causing other misfortunes.3317 It can only be disclosed to beings who have taken up the secret practice of mantras and keep their samaya secret‍—to beings who are well established and trained in the study and practice of the Tathāgata’s instructions, who have good knowledge of the meaning of the Dharma, who keep their samaya concerning the sense bases and psychophysical elements,3318 and who live by the Dharma and are thus true to their promises, firm in their observances, have entered the path of good conduct, and are compassionate. It can be disclosed only to them and not to others.” {54.6}

54.­7

The bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, draped his robe over one shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, and asked the Blessed One with folded hands, “What is this Dharma discourse really,3319 O Blessed One? What should I remember it as?”

The Blessed One replied: {54.7}

54.­8

“You should remember it as a basket of bodhisattva teachings, the thundering roar of all the buddhas and bodhisattvas.

“You should remember it as a text that contains the marvelous and wondrous Dharma instructions. [F.328.b] [F.345.b]

“You should remember it as the bodhisattvas’ instructions for taking up all the practices of the ‘mantra basket.’3320

“You should remember it as an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra with marvelous instructions.3321

“You should remember it as the root manual of Noble Mañjuśrī.

“You should remember it as the instructions that fulfill all the aims of the Dharma. {54.8}

54.­9
“You are a very powerful bodhisattva
Who travels everywhere
Throughout every realm where there are
Those who practice the Dharma and those who do not. {54.9}
54.­10
“Do you not see that this profoundly secret teaching
Is the best of the best among the sūtras
That treat the subject of the mantra methods,
As it removes the dangers related to the place of rebirth? {54.10}
54.­11
“Do you not see, O valiant one,
That this supreme teaching has awakening as its goal?
That an esoteric sūtra such as this
Is adorned with the meaning that needs to be inferred?3322 {54.11}
54.­12
“The diverse meanings of the sūtras
Are presented here according to the mantra system.
There is no other such sūtra in existence,
Apart from this extensive manual of rites. {54.12}
54.­13
“One can obtain kingship, great comforts,
The great fortunes of the gods,
Prosperity, and fame,
Both celestial and human. {54.13}
54.­14
“One will be able to avoid the eight unfree states,
And bring about the eight freedoms.
One will become a master of the three vehicles3323
Destined to attain buddhahood. {54.14}
54.­15
“There is merit in memorizing this sūtra
And there are the following advantages:
Neither poison nor fire will be able
To harm any part of one’s body, {54.15}
54.­16
“And whatever vetālas, grahas,
Pūtanas, mātṛs, thieves,3324
Rākṣasas, or piśācas there are,3325 {54.16}
54.­17
“They will not be able to harm
Someone who recites this sūtra,
Memorizes it, or worships it, again and again,
With offerings of various kinds. {54.17}
54.­18
“Fearless, one should worship it
With music3326 and anything that may be offered.
One will then obtain
The following advantages: {54.18}
54.­19
“If one is unwell, one will be freed from disease.
If one experiences suffering, one will become happy.
If one is poor, one will obtain wealth.
If one is in bondage, one will be freed. [F.329.a] [F.346.a] {54.19}
54.­20
“One who has fallen into the suffering of saṃsāra
With its five realms of rebirth
Will attain the unwavering state
Of well-being, happiness, and nirvāṇa. {54.20}
54.­21
“One will realize the awakening of a pratyeka­buddha
Or attain the state of a śrāvaka.
If one reads this sūtra aloud,
One will attain buddhahood.3327 {54.21}
54.­22
“The merit of reciting this sūtra is the same as
All the merit that one would obtain through
Worshiping the victorious ones, said to be
As uncountable as the sand grains in the Gaṅgā. {54.22}
54.­23
“If one were to continually worship the names
Of the buddhas as numerous as the atoms
In the tens of millions of inconceivable [buddha]fields,
However many there are in this world; {54.23}
54.­24
“If one were to offer to these buddhas various types
Of food, drink, invigorating tonics,
And various seats and beds,
Giving them continually to all of them; {54.24}
54.­25
“And if one were to offer them various garments,
Scented powders, robes,3328 ornaments,
Parasols, shoes, cloth,
Fragrances, garlands, unguents, {54.25}
54.­26
“And various types of incense,
With lamps all around,
The merit thus obtained would be the same
As the merit obtained by memorizing and reciting this teaching. {54.26}
54.­27
“However many pratyeka­buddhas there are
In this world, or śrāvakas of great majesty,
Or bodhisattvas, great beings
Established on the tenth level, {54.27}
54.­28
“The merit that one would obtain
Through worshiping them
Would be the same as the merit of someone
Who holds [this sūtra] volume in their hand. {54.28}
54.­29
“However many beings are said to dwell
In the world with its spheres,
Who are described as being free
From the fever [of the afflictions], {54.29}
54.­30
“The merit that one would obtain
Through worshiping them sincerely, again and again,
Would be the same that a wise person would obtain
Through worshiping this supreme teaching. {54.30}
54.­31
“Not even the most eminent, jewel-like victors
Can obtain the same merit in tens of millions of eons
That one can obtain through worshiping
This finest Dharma treasury of the lords of the world. {54.31}
54.­32
“If one recites and memorizes the mantras
Taught by Mañjughoṣa in this manual,
This supreme teaching will become
A precious wish-fulfilling jewel. {54.32}
54.­33
“It will become a cow of plenty for the reciter,
And a source of great enjoyment [F.329.b] [F.346.b] and wealth.
If someone with an indefatigable mind
Accomplishes these mantras here on earth, {54.33}
54.­34
“They will bring results, as taught by the Sage,
With the inferred meaning becoming the true meaning.3329
If one performs the rites at the right time,
One will become a vidyādhara on earth. {54.34}
54.­35
“All the places, it is said, will be replete for him
With precious good fortune.
His illustrious course of rebirths will be fruitful,
And his actions will be praised by the good. {54.35}
54.­36
“Should a king memorize a single mantra
From this excellent manual,
He will obtain a royal fortune with all its benefits,
And a long and prosperous life. {54.36}
54.­37
“Such a distinguished king will obtain
A life of various pleasurable pursuits.
He will not be harmed by weapons or poisons,
Whether from animate or inanimate sources, {54.37}
54.­38
“Or the effects of inimical magical vidyās,
Such as the mantras employed in the vetāla practices.
Corrupt practitioners who engage in hostile rites
Here on earth will not be able to harm him. {54.38}
54.­39
“He will not be in any danger of fire.
Malevolent grahas or other such beings
Will not assail his body, regardless of
Whether he is a king or an ordinary person.3330 {54.39}
54.­40
“The same applies to any person who memorizes
And recites this excellent sūtra of great importance.
Any king who, before a battle,
Places it upon his head, {54.40}
54.­41
“So that it forms a parasol above it,
And repeatedly pays homage to it,
Will not be killed by lowly men
With any of their various weapons.3331 {54.41}
54.­42
“If he sends into battle
An effigy of the princely youth,3332
Seated on a peacock seat
And mounted on the back of an elephant, {54.42}
54.­43
“The enemies, seeing the divine youth
In his youthful form
Adorned with ornaments,
Will all become mutually hostile and retreat. {54.43}
54.­44
“If this [effigy], made of gold or silver,
Is fitted onto a banner handle,
Raised up on top of banners and flags,
Well positioned and well set,3333 {54.44}
54.­45
“And taken to a battlefield
Swarming with enemies, [F.330.a] [F.347.a]
Their various weapons raised
At the commencement of fighting, {54.45}
54.­46
“Those enemies will perish through merely seeing it
Or will become completely confused.
The human and nonhuman beings;
The human kings and the lords of gods; {54.46}
54.­47
“The siddhas and the vidyādharas
Who rely on the mantra methods;
The rākṣasas, even though they may be courageous;
The kaṭapūtanas and the mātṛs; {54.47}
54.­48
“The different types of kravyādas;
The yakṣas, kuṣmāṇḍas, and pūtanas‍—
All will become incapacitated through merely seeing
The raised banner with the divine youth perched upon it, {54.48}
54.­49
“All-accomplishing and possessing
Many forms and aspects‍—
The great being Mañjughoṣa himself,
The supreme lord of the tenth level.3334 {54.49}
54.­50
“There once was a great kṣatriya king,3335
Who lived and reigned on earth.
He had faith, was free from indecision or doubts,
And was a fond patron of the Dharma. {54.50}
54.­51
“Having generated faith in the Sugata,
With a mind filled with compassion
And eager to find the esoteric meaning,3336
He undertook to perform the rituals taught here. {54.51}
54.­52
“The victors who abide in the sphere of phenomena
Taught these [rituals] as part of their doctrine.
They taught them in this manual of rites that employ mantras
And fit into the mantra system taught here on earth. {54.52}
54.­53
“The innumerable victors of the past
Who dwell in the sphere of phenomena
Taught this Dharma treasury
On earth to human beings. {54.53}
54.­54
“In times past, while a dreadful war
Was being waged between the gods and the asuras,
The army of [Indra]3337
Was destroyed by its enemies.3338 {54.54}
54.­55
“Alone on the earth, dispirited,
Without a chariot,3339
He approached, at that time, Kāśyapa,
The best of sages and the supreme Victor. {54.55}
54.­56
“ ‘What can I do?’
Were the words uttered by the husband of Śacī.
‘I have been defeated by the cruel asuras
And now seek refuge here with you.’ {54.56}
54.­57
“Having said this, the god of bounty3340
Who has performed one hundred sacrifices3341
Bowed to the distinguished sage,
Touching his feet with the top of his head, {54.57}
54.­58
“And then the thousand-eyed Kauśika3342
Sat down as before.
The distinguished sage, brahmin Kāśyapa,
Thus addressed, {54.58}
54.­59
“Replied in a voice as sweet
As the song of a cuckoo bird,
‘In the past, the supreme victors praised in songs
The divine youth who is the source of everything. {54.59}
54.­60
“ ‘He is the great being Mañjuśrī,
Difficult to meet, endowed with one hundred thousand powers,3343
And said to abide in the ultimate reality. [F.330.b] [F.347.b]
He guides beings to the deep meaning. {54.60}
54.­61
“ ‘You should recollect him now, O lord of gods,
As one who shows the Dharma to beings,
Himself being without conceptual elaboration,
Mental disposition, independent existence, or location.’ {54.61}
54.­62
“Being thus caused by Kāśyapa to be recollected,
And then recollected by Indra as one who abides in reality,
Precisely at that moment,
The omnifarious divine youth
Arrived at the place where Blessed Kāśyapa
And Maghavan,3344 the lord of gods, were.3345 {54.62}
54.­63
“After arriving, the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī3346
Saluted the supreme Victor.
Having bowed to all the eminent victors
And to Kāśyapa of great splendor,
He pronounced the following mantra
After first obtaining the sage’s consent: {54.63}
54.­64

“ ‘Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas who are perfect teachers!

“ ‘Oṁ, kill, kill all those that pose danger! Destroy and annihilate them! Make them afraid! Crush, chop, and break them! Burn them, burn! Huṁ huṁ, phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā!’3347 {54.64}

54.­65

“As soon as this mantra was pronounced by the great being, the divine youth Mañjuśrī, the earth with its mountains and oceans, up to its farthest reaches, shook in six different ways, and so did all the infinite buddhafields and world spheres up to their farthest limits. All the blessed buddhas empowered the words of the mantra. {54.65}

54.­66

“Śakra, the lord of gods, his fear gone and body hair bristling, struck with amazement and wonder, his eyes wide open, rose from his seat, bowed down to the feet of the Blessed One, and circumambulated him clockwise three times. Then, turning to and looking at the divine youth Mañjuśrī, he grasped and kept in his mind the words of the mantra. He mounted his chariot and rode to where all the asuras were. Confronted by him in their subterranean paradise, in their capital city that the ocean rests upon, they all attacked. However, seeing the lord of gods blazing like fire, the asuras became smitten and dazed in their minds, [F.331.a] [F.348.a] and their armies were struck with fear. They now grew weak and despondent, their haughty expressions changed, and they lost their weapons. They turned back and retreated to their own abodes.3348 {54.66}

54.­67

“Śakra, the lord of gods, then addressed the gods in the realm of the Thirty-Three:

“ ‘Do not be afraid, friends, do not be afraid! We have defeated the asuras through the power of the Buddha. Now let us go home. Come, gentlemen! Having returned to your fine houses and abodes, each of you to his own, you can play, rejoice, and move around freely.’

“And so the gods, uplifted in their minds, turned around and went to their own abodes. {54.67}

54.­68

“Śakra, the lord of gods, thought, ‘If I make an effigy in the form of the divine youth and mount it atop a banner, there will be no danger for me from the asuras.’ The lord of gods, with his great might, procured then a precious gem called Shining with the Inner Light,3349 fashioned from it a figure in the form of the divine youth, firmly fixed it on top of a banner, and placed it in Sudharmā, the assembly hall of the gods, at the top of the palace in the middle of his great city Sudarśana. {54.68}

54.­69

“From then on, the asuras, headed by Prahlāda and Vemacitri, stayed in their subterranean paradise. They did not travel upward, nor did they attack the gods. They were unable to work miracles or confront anyone in battle. This will last, in human reckoning,3350 many hundreds of thousands of billions of years. Thus, there will now be no danger from the asuras. {54.69}

54.­70

“This celebrated [Dharma treatise] is thus a boon of infinite qualities;3351 [F.331.b] [F.348.b] it promotes long life and good health, as taught by the blessed buddhas and the great beings, the bodhisattvas in the past. It is full of excellent qualities and brings infinite benefits, without beginning and without end.3352 {54.70}

54.­71

“Anyone who contradicts this Dharma treatise, doubts it, or thoughtlessly steps over it will accumulate boundless nonvirtue. They will fall into one of the great hells or suffer the tribulations of birth in the animal realm or the Yama realm of the pretas. Those who claim that this Dharma treatise is not the word of the Buddha and that the mantras and the remedies in it do not come from the bodhisattvas, who deny the greatness of the bodhisattvas and their power to work miracles, who throw away or abandon this Dharma treatise claiming that it was originally taught by dishonorable people, they will proceed to the lower states of existence where they will be unable to understand this Dharma treatise or even hear it. When they depart from that state, they will have accumulated a great deal of nonvirtue, so it is said. {54.71}

54.­72
“Foolish people who reject
This excellent teaching
Taught in song by the eminent sages
And the sagacious sons of the victors3353 {54.72}
54.­73
“Will, because of this, go to hell,
With its subdivisions lying above or horizontally,3354
Such as Kālasūtra, Sañjīva,
Kṣuradhārā, Gūthamṛttikā,3355 {54.73}
54.­74
“Kuṇapa, Kṣāranadī,
Where they will be seized in Jvaradhārā,3356
The terrible Asipattra forest,
Avava,3357 Hahava, {54.74}
54.­75
“Or the hell for evildoers,
Renowned in the world as Aṭaṭa.
Those who bring harm upon the Dharma
Will go to one of these hells. {54.75}
54.­76
“The terrible hell called Avīci
Is well known in the world
As a walled-in place for reviled evildoers,
Who make up its population.3358 {54.76} [F.332.a] [F.349.a]
54.­77
“People who destroy this teaching
Will be roasted there.
People who are always mindless will visit3359
All of the hells as deep down as Avīci. {54.77}
54.­78
“They will experience death and subsequent rebirth3360
Throughout the infinite hell realms.
Those who reject this extensive sūtra
That is the sum total of the Dharma3361 {54.78}
54.­79
“Become reviled in the world
And fall into the hells that end in Avīci,
Completely deprived of their own will.3362 {54.79}
54.­80
“This3363 sūtra called the ‘Manual of Rites’
Is adorned with the knowledge of mantras.
Through hundreds of wonderful accomplishments,
It lays bare the ultimate reality,3364 {54.80}
54.­81
“Which is experienced in meditation without support
And constitutes the body of the sphere of phenomena.
This extensive manual of rites
With its detailed chapters {54.81}
54.­82
“Was skillfully laid down by Mañjughoṣa
And duly3365 worshiped by Śrīmati.
Many original rites of Mañjuśrī
Are presented here in full. {54.82}
54.­83
“This manual is free from both extreme views,
Those of eternalism and of nihilism.3366
It explains the stages in the right order
And constitutes a collective body of mantras. {54.83}
54.­84
“It clearly explains
Fire, wind, and space as empty.
One who rejects this manual is always reborn,
Going from one low birth to another. {54.84}
54.­85
“As the supreme Victor,
I accumulated infinite merit
In the course of many long eons,
And attained awakening. {54.85}
54.­86
“I subsequently taught this root manual
To fulfill the aims of the mantra system.
By being an auspicious means of purification that destroys negativity,
This manual wards off the dangers associated with the places of rebirth. {54.86}
54.­87
“It has been presented in detailed chapters
That adorn this sūtra of definitive meaning.3367
It includes the descriptions of the great qualities of kings
Explained according to their relevant period and place. {54.87}
54.­88
“This sacred Dharma of the victors’ sons
Was taught by the seventh sage,3368
The best among the victors
Who have taken human birth on earth. {54.88}
54.­89
“It was taught in the form of this extensive manual
That produces [F.332.b] [F.349.b] splendor and good fortune.
It is described as an extensive volume3369 with a good foundation
And is revered as part of the mantra system.3370 {54.89}
54.­90
“Anyone on earth who rejects
This excellent, important sūtra,
This Dharma treasury endowed with power by the victors,
Will fall, after death, into Avīci, the worst of hells,
For many great eons, as described
In different works.3371 {54.90}
54.­91
“During his life as a human,
Whenever this happens to be,
He will be poor, diseased, and dumb.
He will be born as a mleccha,
Will be reviled in the world,
And will contract leprosy. {54.91}
54.­92
“He will smell bad and inspire disgust.
Blind and missing limbs,3372
He will have a terribly unattractive form,
Always be dirty, and look, here on earth, like a preta. {54.92}
54.­93
“He will be poorly clothed,3373 depressed,
With ugly nails, and generally detestable.
He will be eaten by parasites
And will be covered by sores and blisters. {54.93}
54.­94
“Stinking and utterly revolting,
He will have no partner for conversation
But will walk around absentmindedly,
Becoming ever more feebleminded.3374 {54.94}
54.­95
“One who rejects this Dharma treasury,
This revered relic of the victorious ones,
Will meet with a lot of pain
And be without relatives, friends, or a protector.3375 {54.95}
54.­96
“As a human being, one will experience
Many times grief and suffering.
Wherever one goes,
One will never be happy.
Different [negative] results will follow
If one rejects this sūtra.”3376 {54.96}
54.­97

The divine youth Mañjuśrī, the bodhisattva great being, now rose from his seat, draped his upper robe over his shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, folded his hands,3377 and, with wide open and unblinking eyes, knowing that all the gods who inhabit the Pure Abode and many orders of beings had assembled in order to hear the Dharma, said to Blessed Śākyamuni: {54.97}

54.­98

“It is wonderful, O Blessed One, that you have presented this Dharma treatise so eloquently. In the future time, O Blessed One, it will come to pass that beings will be overcome by dangerous greed, their minds will be dominated by the five degenerations, they will lack faith, and they will be deceitful, unruly, and undisciplined.3378 They will not believe in the greatness of the of the art of mantras, [F.333.a] [F.350.a] nor will they appreciate the necessity to observe the restrictions regarding the time and the place of worship. Nor will they believe in the elaborate rituals with their injunctions pertaining to the mantra conduct,3379 homa offerings, or mantra recitation. Thinking that this is not the Buddha’s teaching, they will reject it. They will develop mental anguish and die. They will thus experience intense suffering and feel sharp and acute pain. They will end up in the great hells. When beings suffer like this, O Blessed One, how can this be remedied? The lord buddhas are very compassionate, after all.” {54.98}

54.­99

The blessed Śākyamuni touched Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, on the head, and said, “Good it is, good indeed, that you, Mañjuśrī, are concerned about the welfare and the interests of all beings, and it is also good that you, Mañjuśrī, ask the Tathāgata about it. Listen well, then, and duly reflect upon what I will now tell you for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of all beings and to act kindly toward the world. There is, O divine youth, in your root manual with its detailed chapters, a most secret vidyārāja that should be remembered at the time of death by men and gods who strongly desire to take the final refuge in the supreme body of the dharmadhātu,3380 thus taking the path to awakening that subsumes all mantra practices. So what is this vidyā? {54.99}

54.­100

“Homage to all the worthy tathāgatas, the fully realized buddhas!

“Oṁ, the omnifarious form3381 of the divine youth, come, come! Quick, quick! [F.333.b] [F.350.b] Bhrūṃ bhrūṃ, hūṁ hūṁ!3382 O victorious Victor! Splendorous Mañjuśrī!3383 Deliver me from all suffering! Phaṭ phaṭ! Pacify, pacify! You who arise from and are the source of immortality,3384 destroy my negativity, svāhā!3385 {54.100}

54.­101

“This, Mañjuśrī, is your ultimate heart essence that makes everything peaceful, removes all negativity, and releases from all suffering. It brings long life, good health, vigor, supreme well-being, and increases the powers of speech. It also stirs up the goodness in all the vidyā kings.”3386

As soon as the blessed Buddha Śākyamuni pronounced this mantra, this great earth with all its mountains, oceans, and animate and inanimate things, up to its farthest reaches, shook in six different ways, and the sufferings of all the beings of the different classes‍—the pretas, the animals, and all the beings in the worlds of Yama3387 ‍—completely ceased.3388 {54.101}

54.­102

“This king of mantras, Mañjuśrī, should be kept in mind, so that, at that time,3389 there will be no thought of giving up the sacred Dharma, the evil māras will not have any opportunity to cause harm, and all the vighnas and vināyakas will run away.

“The blessed buddhas will know my thoughts, if I should reflect, ‘What am I capable of? Will I accept or reject the inconceivable Dharma of the realization of the blessed buddhas?’ ”3390 {54.102}

54.­103

This concludes the detailed chapter about the consequences of praising or blaming [this Dharma manual], fifty-fourth3391 in “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings.3392


54.­104

When the Blessed One had finished teaching, [F.334.a] [F.351.a] the monks, the bodhisattvas, their retinues, and billions of other beings present above the Pure Abode3393 such as gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, asuras, garuḍas, kinnaras, mahoragas, siddhas, and vidyādharas; as well as many prominent ṛṣis and the great bodhisattva beings including the divine youth Mañjuśrī, Avalokiteśvara, Maitreya, Mahā­sthāna­prāpta,3394 Vajrapāṇi, and so forth; the blessed buddhas with the retinues of śrāvakas and pratyeka­buddhas who dwell in innumerable world systems and in the infinite sphere of phenomena; and the inconceivable buddhas dwelling in the sky-like nature and the bodhisattva great beings, were all very pleased and praised the Blessed One’s teaching.3395

54.­105

This concludes “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” presented as it was passed down.3396


c.

Colophon

c.­1

By order of the glorious ruler and renunciant king Jangchub O, this text was translated, edited, and finalized by the great Indian preceptor and spiritual teacher Kumārakalaśa and the translator Lotsawa and monk Śākya Lodrö.3397


ap.
Appendix

Sanskrit Text

app.

Introduction to the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa

app.­1

The Sanskrit text presented here is meant to accompany the English translation. It is based on five manuscripts as detailed in the list of abbreviations for this appendix. The default source for the text presented here was Śāstrī’s (Śāstrī 1920–25)3398 published transcript of manuscript T. Variant readings are reported only when they replace Śāstrī’s readings or when deemed relevant. The notes in the critical apparatus list the variants in the order of relevance, departing from the usual practice of listing them in the alphabetical order of the sigla. It is incomplete; it leaves out three blocks of chapters not included in the Tibetan canonical translation.

ap1.

Chapter A1

ap1.­1

{S1} {V1} {B1v} oṁ3399 namaḥ sarva­buddha­bodhi­sattvebhyaḥ ||


evaṃ mayā śrutam ekasmin samaye | bhaga­vāñ śuddhāvāsopari gagana­tala­pratiṣṭhite 'cintyāś­caryādbhuta­pravibhakta­bodhi­sattva­sannipāta­maṇḍala­māḍe3400 viharati sma | tatra bhaga­vāñ śuddhāvāsa­kāyikān deva­putrān āmantrayate sma || 1.1 ||

ap1.­2

śṛṇvantu bhavanto3401 deva­putrāḥ mañjuśriyaḥ3402 kumāra­bhūtasya bodhi­sattvasya mahā­sattvasyācintyādbhuta­prātihārya­caryā­samādhi­rddhi3403viśeṣa­vimokṣa­maṇḍala­bodhi­sattva­vikurvaṇaṃ sarva­sattvopajīvyam āyur ārogyaiśvaryam3404 | manoratha­paripūrakāṇi3405 mantra­padāni sarva­sattvānāṃ hitāya bhāṣiṣye | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye 'haṃ te3406 || 1.2 ||

ap2.

Chapter A2

ap2.­1

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūtaḥ sarvāvantaṃ parṣanmaṇḍalam avalokya sarvasattvasamayānupraveśāvalokinīṃ nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyate sma | samanantarasamāpannasya ca mañjuśriyaḥ kumara­bhūtasya nābhimaṇḍalapradeśād raśmir niścaranti sma | {B25r} anekaraśmi­koṭī­niyuta­śatasahasra­parivāritā samantāt sarvasattvadhātum avabhāsya punar eva taṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanaṃ avabhāsya sthitābhūt || 2.1 ||

ap2.­2

atha khalu vajrapāṇir bodhisattvo mahā­sattvo mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

ap3.

Chapter A3

ap3.­1

atha tṛtīyaḥ parivartaḥ ||

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūtaḥ punar api taṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya tān mahā­parṣanmaṇḍalasannipatitān sarvabuddhabodhisattvān praṇamya • ekākṣaraṃ paramaguhyaṃ sarvaviṣaghātasarvakarmikaṃ ca mantraṃ svamaṇḍalasādhanaupayikaṃ sarvakṣudrakarmeṣu copayojyaṃ bhāṣate sma | katamaṃ ca tat || 3.1 ||

ap3.­2

namaḥ samanta­buddhānām | tadyathā jaḥ | eṣa sa mārṣāḥ sārvabhūtagaṇāś ca asyaiva mantram ekākṣarasya dvitīyaṃ maṇḍalavidhānaṃ saṃkṣepato yojyam || 3.2 ||

ap4.

Chapter A4

ap4.­1

namo buddhāya sarvabuddhabodhisattvebhyaḥ ||

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ sarvāvantaṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya punar api tan mahā­parṣanmaṇḍalasannipātam avalokya śākyamuneś caraṇayor nipatya prahasitavadano bhūtvā bhagavantam etad avocat || 4.1 ||

ap4.­2

tat sādhu bhagavān sarvasattvānāṃ hitāya mantra­caryā­sādhana­vidhānanirhāraniṣyanda­dharma­megha­pravarṣaṇa­yathepsita­phalaniṣpādana­paṭala­visarāt4349 paṭavidhānam anuttarapuṇyaprasavaḥ samyaksambodhibīja4350•abhinirvartakaṃ sarvajñajñānāśeṣa•abhinirvartakam || 4.2 ||

ap5.

Chapter A5

ap5.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvaṃ tatparṣanmaṇḍalam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate4427 sma |

asti mañjuśrīr aparam api tvadīyaṃ madhyamaṃ paṭavidhānam | tad bhāṣiṣye 'ham | śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru || 5.1 ||

ap5.­2

ādau tāvat pūrvanirdiṣṭenaiva sūtrakeṇa pūrvoktenaiva vidhinā pūrvaparikalpitaiḥ śilpibhiḥ pūrvapramāṇaiva madhyamapaṭaḥ suśobhanena śuklena suvratena sadaśena • aśleṣakai raṅgair apagatakeśasaṃkārādibhir yathaiva prathamaṃ tathaiva tat kuryād varjayitvā tu pramāṇarūpakāt tat paṭaṃ paścād abhilikhāpayitavyam || 5.2 ||

ap6.

Chapter A6

ap6.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | asti mañjuśrīr aparam api paṭavidhānarahasyaṃ tṛtīyaṃ kanyasaṃ nāma yaḥ sarvasattvānām ayatnenaiva siddhiṃ gaccheyuḥ || 6.1 ||

ap6.­2

pūrvanirdiṣṭenaiva vidhinā śilpibhiḥ sugatavitastipramāṇaṃ tiryak tathaiva samaṃ caturasraṃ pūrvavat paṭaś citrāpayitavyaḥ pūrvanirdiṣṭai raṅgaiḥ || 6.2 ||

ap6.­3

ādau tāvad ārya­mañjuśrīḥ siṃhāsanopaniṣaṇṇo bāladārakarūpī pūrvavad dharmaṃ deśayamānaḥ samanta­prabhā•arciṣo nirgacchamānaś cārurūpī citrāpayitavyaḥ | vāmapārśve ārya­samanta­bhadro ratnopalasthitaś camaravyagrahastaś cintāmaṇivāmavinyastakaraḥ priyaṅguśyāmavarṇaḥ pūrvavac citrāpayitavyaḥ | dakṣiṇapārśve • ārya­mañjuśriyasya ratnopalasthita āryāvalokiteśvaraḥ | pūrvavac camaravyagrahasto vāmahastāravindavinyastaḥ samanta­dyotitamūrtir abhilekhyaḥ || 6.3 ||

ap7.

Chapter A7

ap7.­1

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūta utthāyāsanād bhagavantaṃ śākya­muniṃ triḥ pradakṣiṇīkṛtya bhagavataś caraṇayor nipatya bhagavantam evam āha ||

sādhu sādhu bhagavatā yas tathāgatenārhatā samyaksambuddhena subhāṣito 'yaṃ dharma­paryāyaḥ sarvavidyāvratacāriṇām arthāya hitāya sukhāya lokānukampāyai | bodhisattvānām upāyakauśalyatā darśitā nirvāṇoparigāminī vartmopaviśeṣā niyataṃ bodhiparāyaṇā saṃtatir bodhisattvānāṃ sarvamantrārthacaryā sādhanīyam | etanmantrarahasyasarvajanavistāraṇakarī bhaviṣyati || 7.1 ||

ap8.

Chapter A8

ap8.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­munir mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

ye te mañjuśrīs tvayā nirdiṣṭā sattvā teṣām arthāya • idaṃ paṭavidhānaṃ visaram ākhyātam | te svalpenaivopāyena sādhayiṣyante | teṣām arthāya sādhanopayikaṃ4498 guṇa­vistāra­prabhedavibhāgaśaḥ karma­vibhāgaṃ samanubhāṣiṣyāmi | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye sarva­sattvānām arthāya || 8.1 ||

ap8.­2

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūto bhaga­vantam etad avocat |

ap9.

Chapter A9

ap9.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvāvatīparṣanmaṇḍalopaniṣaṇṇān deva­saṅghān āmantrayate sma |

śṛṇvantu bhavanto mārṣā mañjuśriyasya kumara­bhūtasya caryāmaṇḍalamantrasādhanopāyikaṃ4509 rakṣārthaṃ sādhakasya paramaguhyatamaṃ paramaguhyahṛdayaṃ sarvatathāgatabhāṣitaṃ mahā­vidyārājaṃ yena japtena sarvamantrā japtā bhavanti || 9.1 ||

ap9.­2

anatikramaṇīyo 'yaṃ bho deva­saṅghā ayaṃ vidyārājā | mañjuśriyo 'pi kumara­bhūto 'nena vidyārājñā • ākṛṣṭo vaśam ānīto sammatībhūtaḥ | kaḥ punarvādaḥ | tadanye bodhisattvā laukikalokottarāś ca mantrāḥ | sarvavighnāṃś ca nāśayaty eṣa mahā­vīryaḥ prabhāva ekavīrya eka • eva sarvamantrāṇām agram ākhyāyate | eka • eva • ekākṣarāṇām akṣaram ākhyāyate | katamaṃ ca tat || 9.2 ||

ap10.

Chapter A10

ap10.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api karmasādhanottamaṃ bhāṣate sma |

iha kalparāje anyatamaṃ mantraṃ gṛhītvā gaṅgāmahā­nadīm avatīrya nauyānasaṃsthitaḥ gaṅgāyā madhye kṣīrodanāhāras triṃśallakṣāṇi japet yatheṣṭadivasaiḥ | tato japānte sarvān nāgān paśyati | tataḥ sādhanam ārabhet4521 | tatraiva naumadhye agnikuṇḍaṃ kārayet padmākāram | tato nāgakesarapuṣpaiḥ paṭasya mahatīṃ pūjāṃ kṛtvā jyeṣṭhaṃ paṭaṃ paścānmukhaṃ pratiṣṭhāpya ātmanaś ca pūrvābhimukhaṃ kuśaviṇḍakopaviṣṭo nāgakesarapuṣpam ekaikaṃ saptābhimantritaṃ kṛtvā khadirakāṣṭhendhanāgniprajvālite juhuyād yāvat triṃśasahasrāṇi śvetacandanakuṅkumapūtānāṃ nāgakesarapuṣpānāṃ4522 nānyeṣām | nāgānāṃ darśanam avekṣyam | siddhadravyaiś ca pralobhayanti | na grahītavyāni || 10.1 ||

ap11.

Chapter A11

ap11.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyaṃ madhyamaṃ paṭavidhānaṃ madhyamakarmopayikasādhanavidhiḥ | samāsatas tāṃ bhāṣiṣye | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye || 11.1 ||

ap11.­2

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūto bhagavantam evam āhuḥ |

tad vadatu bhagavān lokānukampakaḥ śāstā sarvasattvahite rato yasyedānīṃ kālaṃ manyase | asmākam anukampārtham anāgatānāṃ ca janatām avekṣya || 11.2 ||

ap12.

Chapter A12

ap12.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api sarvāvantaṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma ||

śṛṇu tvaṃ mañjuśrīs tvadīyaṃ vidyāmantrānusāriṇāṃ sakalasattvārthasamprayuktānāṃ sattvānāṃ yena jāpyante mantrā yena vā jāpyante • akṣasūtravidhiṃ sarvatantreṣu sāmānyasādhanopayikasarvamantrāṇām | taṃ śṛṇu sādhu ca suṣṭhu ca manasi kuru | bhāṣiṣye || 12.1 ||

ap12.­2

evam ukte mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūto bhagavantam etad avocat |

ap13.

Chapter A13

ap13.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api4723 śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | asti mañjuśrīḥ tvadīya4724mantra­paṭala­samasta­vinyasta­viśeṣavidhinā homakarmaṇi prayuktasya vidyāsādhakasya • agnyupacaryā4725viśeṣavidhānato yatra pratiṣṭhitā sarvavidyācaryāniyuktāḥ sattvāḥ prayujyante | katamaṃ ca tat | rahasyavidyāmantrapadāni | tadyathā ||4726 13.1 ||

ap13.­2

{A27v3}4727 oṁ uttiṣṭha4728 haripiṅgala lohitākṣa dehi dadāpaya hūṃ phaṭ phaṭ sarvavighnān vināśaya svāhā ||

ap14.

Chapter A14

ap14.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyavidyā­rahasya­sādhanopayika­sarva­mantrāṇāṃ samanujñas tathāgatadharmakośavisṛta dharmameghānupraviṣṭa gagana­svabhāva sarva­mantrāṇāṃ laukika­lokottarāṇāṃ prabhur jyeṣṭhatamo yathā kumāraḥ sarvasattvānām | tathāgato 'tra •ākhyāyate jyeṣṭhatamaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ | devamanuṣyāṇāṃ puruṣaṛṣabho buddho bhagavān evaṃ hi kumāra sarvamantrāṇām ayaṃ vidyārājā • agram ākhyāyate śreṣṭhatamaḥ | pūrvanirdiṣṭaṃ tathāgatair anabhilāpyair gaṅgānadīsikatapuṇyair buddhair bhagavadbhī ratnaketos tathāgatasya paramahṛdayaṃ paramaguhyaṃ sarva­maṅgalasammata­sarva­buddha­saṃstuta­praśastaṃ sarvabuddha sattvasamāśvāsakaṃ sarvapāpapraṇāśakaṃ sarvakāmadaṃ sarvāśāparipūrakam | katamaṃ ca tat || 14.1 ||

ap15.

Chapter A15

ap15.­1

atha khalu vajrapāṇir bodhisattvo mahā­sattvas tatraiva parṣanmadhye saṃnipatito 'bhūt | saṃniṣaṇṇaḥ sa utthāyāsanād bhagavantaṃ triḥ pradakṣiṇīkṛtya bhagavataś caraṇayor nipatya bhagavantam etad avocat || 15.1 ||

ap15.­2

sādhu sādhu bhagavan | sudeśitaṃ suprakāśitaṃ paramasubhāṣitaṃ vidyāmantraprayogamahā­dharmameghavinisṛtaṃ sarvatathāgatahṛdayaṃ mahā­vidyārājacakravartinamahā­kalpavistarasarvārtha4832pāripūrakaṃ saphalaṃ sampādakabodhimārganiruttaraṃ kriyābheda­saṃdhya­japa­homa­vidya­caryānuvartināṃ mārgaṃ dṛṣṭa­phala­karma­pratyayajanitahetunimitta­mahādbhuta­daśa­balākramaṇa­kuśala­bodhi­maṇḍa-m-ākramaṇaniyataparāyaṇam | tat sādhu bhagavān vadatu śāstā mantrasādhanānukūlāni svapnasaṃdarśanakālanimittam yena vidyāsādhakānuvartinaḥ sattvāḥ siddhinimittaṃ karma • ārabheyuḥ saphalāś ca sarvavidyāḥ karmanimittāni bhavanti-r-iti || 15.2 ||

ap16.

Chapter A16

ap16.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya4907 mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ | tvadīye sarvārthakriyākarmapaṭalavisaraṃ pūrvanirdiṣṭaṃ parṣanmaṇḍalamadhye savistaraṃ vakṣye 'ham | pṛṣṭo 'yaṃ yakṣarājena vajrahastena dhīmatā || 16.1 ||

ap16.­2
sarvamantrārthayuktānāṃ svapnānāṃ ca śubhāśubham |
ata prasaṅgena sarvedaṃ kathitaṃ mantrajāpinām || 16.2 ||
ap16.­3
yakṣarāṭ tuṣṭamanaso mūrdhni kṛtvā tu • añjalim |
praṇamya śirasā śāstur abhyuvāca girāṃ tadā4908 || 16.3 ||
ap17.

Chapter A17

ap17.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvatathāgatavikurvitaṃ nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyate sma | samanantarasamāpannasya bhagavataḥ śākyamuner ūrṇākośād raśmayo niścarati sma | nīlapītāvadātamāñjiṣṭhasphaṭikavarṇaḥ | sarvaṃ cedaṃ budhakṣetram avabhāsya sarvalokadhātvantarāṇi cālokayitvā sarvagrahanakṣatrāṃś ca muhūrtamātreṇa jihmīkṛtyākṛṣṭavān4928 | ākṛṣṭā ca svakasvakā sthānāni saṃniyojya tat parṣanmaṇḍalaṃ buddhādhiṣṭhānenākṛṣya ca tatraiva bhagavataḥ śākyamuner ūrṇākośāntardhīyate sma | sarvaṃ ca grahanakṣatratārakāḥ • jyotiṣo-r-uparudhyamānā ārtā bhītā bhagavantaṃ śākya­muniṃ prajagmuḥ | kṛtāñjalayaś ca tasthure prakampayamānā muhur muhuś ca dharaṇitale prapatanamānāḥ || 17.1 ||

ap24.

Chapter A24

ap24.­1

4945atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvanakṣatragrahatārakajyotiṣāṃ sarvaloka­dhātuparyāpannānāṃ sarvadigvyavasthitān sarvamaharddhikotkṛṣṭatarāṅ grahān4946 āmantrayate sma || 24.1 ||

ap24.­2

śṛṇvantu bhavanto mārṣāḥ sarva­graha­nakṣatra­prabhāva­svavākyaṃ4947 | prabhāvaṃ nirdeśayituṃ4948 bhavantaḥ | sarvamantrakriyārthāṃ sādhayantu4949 bhavantaḥ | samaye ca tiṣṭhantu bhavantaḥ4950 | iha kalparāje mañjughoṣasya śāsane siddhiṃ parataś cānyāṃ kalparājāṃsi • autsukyamānā bhavantu bhavanta iti || 24.2 ||

ap25.

Chapter A25

ap25.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api grahanakṣatratārakajyotiṣagaṇān āmantrayate sma || 25.1 ||

ap25.­2

+ + + + śṛṇvantu bhavantaḥ sarve | anatikramaṇīyo 'yaṃ kalparājā mañjuśriyaḥ kumara­bhūtasya mantratantrābhiṣekamaṇḍalavidhānaṃ | na ca5305 japahomaniyamavidyāsādhanapravṛttānām asmiṃ kalpavare vidyādharāṇāṃ tithinakṣatracaritagaṇitām abhijñānāṃ nakṣatrabhavadbhiḥ vighnaṃ kartavyam | pravṛttānāṃ śāsane 'smin sarvaiś ca devasaṅghais tatra rakṣā kāryā | sarve ca duṣṭasattvāni niṣeddhavyāni roddhavyāni śāsayitavyāni | sarve sarvaṃ na ghātayitavyāni | vyavasthāsu ca sthāpayitavyāni śāsane 'smin daśabalānām || 25.2 ||

ap26.

Chapter A26

ap26.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | śṛṇu mañjuśrīr ekākṣaracakravartinasya mahānubhāvasya saṃkṣepeṇa paṭavidhānaṃ bhavati | vistaraśaḥ pūrvam udīritam adhunā saṃkṣepeṇa || 26.1 ||

ap26.­2

yugādhame sattvā alpavīryā bhavanti • alpaprajñā mandacetasaḥ | na śakyante vistaraśaḥ paṭapramāṇaprayogaṃ sādhayitum || 26.2 ||

ap26.­3
saṃkṣepeṇa vakṣye 'haṃ sattvānāṃ hitakāmyayā |
uttamārthaṃ tu yathā siddhiṃ5321 prāpnuvanti sa jāpinaḥ || 26.3 ||
ap27.

Chapter A27

ap27.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya tatrasthāṃś ca devasaṅghān sarvāṃś ca buddhabodhisattvā pratyeka­buddhāryaśrāvakān punar api mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 27.1 ||

ap27.­2

nirdiṣṭo 'yaṃ mañjuśrīḥ sarvatathāgatānāṃ sarvasvabhūtaṃ dharmakośaṃ cintāmaṇipratiprakhyaṃ lokānām āśayasaphalīkaraṇārthaṃ tasmin kāle yugādhame śūnye buddhakṣetre parinirvṛtānāṃ tathāgatānāṃ saddharmanetrī•antardhānakālasamaye tasmin kāle tasmin samaye sarvatathāgatānāṃ mantrakośasaṃrakṣanārthaṃ tvadīyakumāramantratantrāṇāṃ kalparāje 'smin nidhānabhūto bhaviṣyati japyamāno vidhinā sārabhūto 'yaṃ mañjuśrīḥ | sarvatathāgatamantratantrāṇāṃ tvadīye ca kumārakalparāje 'grabhūto bhaviṣyaty ayam ekākṣaracakravartī | anena japyamānena sarve tāthāgatā vidyārājānaḥ japtā bhavanti || 27.2 ||

ap28.

Chapter A28

ap28.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīr aparam api tvadīyapaṭavidhānaṃ sādhanaupayikaṃ sarvakarmārthasādhakam | etenaiva tu • ekākṣareṇa hṛdayamantreṇa ṣaḍakṣareṇa5366 vā makarāntena tvadīyena mūlamantreṇa vā ṣaḍakṣarahṛdayena • oṁkārādyena • ekākṣareṇa vā paṭasyāgrataḥ • asyaiva kalpaṃ bhavati | paścime kāle paścime samaye mayi tathāgate parinirvṛte śūnye buddhakṣetre yugādhame prāpte • atrāṇe loke • aśaraṇe • aparāyaṇe idam eva kalparājā trāṇabhūtaṃ bhaviṣyati | śaraṇabhūtaṃ layanabhūtaṃ parāyaṇabhūtam | katamaṃ ca tat || 28.1 ||

ap29.

Chapter A29

ap29.­1

atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 29.1 ||

ap29.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīye kalpavidhānaparivarte saptamaṃ5397 paṭakarmavidhānaṃ yo5398 tasmin kāle tasmin samaye yugānte sādhayiṣyati5399 • amoghā tasya siddhir bhaviṣyati | saphalā sukhodayā sukhavipākā5400 dṛṣṭadharmavedanīyā sarvadurgatinivāraṇīyā5401 niyataṃ tasya bodhiparāyaṇīyā5402 siddhir bhaviṣyati || 29.2 ||

ap30.

Chapter A30

ap30.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 30.1 ||

ap30.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyamantratantre vidyārājñāṃ cakravartiprabhṛtīnāṃ sarvatathāgatoṣṇīṣapramukhānāṃ sarvamantrāṇāṃ siddhisthānāni bhavanti | tatrottarāpathe sarvatra tāthāgatīvidyārājñaḥ siddhiṃ gacchanti saṃkṣepataḥ || 30.2 ||

ap30.­3
cīne caiva mahācīne mañjughoṣaḥ sedhiṣyate5436 |
ye ca tasya mantrā vai siddhiṃ yāsyanti tatra vai || 30.3 ||
ap31.

Chapter A31

ap31.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ kumāra pūrvanirdiṣṭaṃ padaṃ sattvāviṣṭānāṃ caritaṃ śubhāśubhaṃ nimittaṃ ca vakṣye || 31.1 ||

ap31.­2

atha khalu mañjuśrīḥ kumara­bhūtaḥ • utthāyāsanād bhagavataś caraṇayor nipatya murdhnim añjaliṃ kṛtvā bhagavantam etad avocat ||

tat sādhu bhagavān vadatu sattvānāṃ parasattvadehasaṅkrāntānām ārya­divya †eti† siddha­gandharva­yakṣa­rākṣasa­piśāca­mahoraga­prabhṛtīnāṃ vicitrakarmakṛtaśarīrāṇāṃ vicitragatiniśritānāṃ vividhākārānekacihnānāṃ manuṣyāmanuṣyabhūtānāṃ cittacaritāni | samayo bhagavān samayaḥ sugataḥ | yasyedānīṃ5450 kālaṃ manyase || 31.2 ||

ap32.

Chapter A32

ap32.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 32.1 ||

ap32.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīyamantrāṇāṃ sarvatantreṣu samanupraveśaṃ5477 sarvavidyārahasyam anekakālaguṇasakalaphalodayam apy anubandhanimittam | pramāṇato vakṣye siddhikāraṇāni | tadyathā || 32.2 ||

ap32.­3
janmāntaritā siddhir na siddhiḥ kālahetutaḥ |
tatpramāṇaprayogas tu pūrvasambaddham udbhavā || 32.3 ||
ap32.­4
ahitāvahito siddhir bhaved yuktivicāraṇam |
tvatkumārāśrayayuktir dṛśyate sarvadehinām || 32.4 ||
ap33.

Chapter A33

ap33.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvāvantaṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 33.1 ||

ap33.­2

tvadīye mañjuśrī kalparāje nirdeśa5487samākhyāte dharma­dhātu­kośa­tathāgata­garbha­dharma­dhātu­niṣpandānucarite mahāsūtravararatnapaṭalavisare tathāgataguhyavara-m-anujñāte mantravara5488sādhyamāne nimitta­jñāna­cihnakāla­pramāṇāntarita­sādhanaupayikāni sarvabhūtarutavitāni • asattvasattvasaṃjñānirghoṣāni bhavanti || 33.2 ||

ap34.

Chapter A34

ap34.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api taṃ śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 34.1 ||

ap34.­2

śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ tvadīyamudrāmantraṃ5527 sarahasyaṃ paramaguhyatamam | aprakāśya-m-aśrāddhasattvatathāgataśāsane 'nabhiprasannam asamayānujñātatri­ratnavaṃśānucchedanakare • akalyāṇamitraparigṛhīte puṇyākāme5528 duṣṭajanasamparkavyatimiśrite pāpamitraparigṛhīte dūrībhūte buddhadharmāṇāṃ niṣphalībhūte kalpe 'smin nācāryānupadeśe • anabhiṣikte5529 tava kumāra paramaguhyatame maṇḍale • adṛṣṭasamaye tathāgatakule • asamante jane • aprakāśya sarvabhūtānāṃ tvanmantrānuvartināṃ || 34.2 ||

ap35.

Chapter A35

ap35.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya tathāgatamahāmudrākośasañcodanī nāma samādhiṃ samāpadyate sma | samanantarasamāpannasya bhagavataḥ śākyamune • ūrṇākośān mahāraśmir niścacāra | anekaraśmi­koṭī­nayuta­śata­sahasra­saṅkhyeya­parivārāḥ sā raśmijālā anekān buddhakṣetrān avabhāsayitvā sarvabuddhān sañcodya punar api bhagavataḥ śākyamuner ūrṇākośe 'ntarhitā || 35.1 ||

ap35.­2

samanantarasañcoditāś ca sarve buddhā bhagavanto gaganasvabhāvāṃ samādhiṃ samāpadya śuddhāvāsopari gaganatale pratyaṣṭhāt | atha bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ sarvabuddhān abhyarcya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

ap36.

Chapter A36

ap36.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma |

asti mañjuśrīḥ paramaguhyatamaṃ tvadīyaṃ mūlamudrāsameta saparivāraṃ mudrālakṣaṇaṃ sarvakarmeṣu copayojyaṃ sarvasampattidāyakaṃ saphalaṃ sarvamantrānuvartanaṃ sarvakarmārthasādhakaṃ saṃkṣepataḥ | śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ || 36.1 ||

ap36.­2

ādau tāvat prasṛtāñjalis tarjanyānāmikāmadhyaparvatānupraviṣṭā pṛthak pṛthak | sā eṣā mañjuśrīs tvadīyā mūlamudrā vikhyātā sarvakarmikā bhavati || 36.2 ||

ap37.

Chapter A37

ap37.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 37.1 ||

ap37.­2

asti mañjuśrīs tvadīye mūlakalpe • aparam api mudrā paramaguhyatamam | sarveṣāṃ mudrātantravidhānaṃ sarvamantrāṇāṃ sammataṃ sarvamantraiś ca saha saṃyojyaṃ5619 sarvakarmaprasādhakaṃ samyaksambodhimārgaviśodhakaṃ sarvabhavamārgavināśakaṃ sarvasattvopajīvyam āyurārogyaiśvaryasarvāśāpāripūrakaṃ sarvabodhipakṣadharmaparipūrakaṃ sarvasattvasantoṣaṇakaraṃ sarva­sattva­manāśābhirucita­saphalābhikaraṇaṃ sarvakarmakaraṃ sarvamantrānuprasādhakaṃ sarvamudrāmantrasametam | śṛṇu kumāra mañjuśrīḥ || 37.2 ||

ap38.

Chapter A38

ap38.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma | śṛṇu mañjuśrīḥ |

saṃkṣepato mudrāṇāṃ lakṣaṇaṃ mantrāṇāṃ ca savistaram | saṃkṣepataś ca maṇḍalānāṃ vidhiḥ samayānuvartanaṃ5670 mudrāsthānaṃ ca teṣu vai | sarahasyaṃ sarvamantrāṇāṃ sarvatantreṣu5671 maṇḍalam || 38.1 ||

ap38.­2
etat sarvaṃ purā proktaṃ sarvabuddhair maharddhikaiḥ |
mantrāṇāṃ gatimāhātmyaṃ kathitaṃ sarvakuleṣv api |
ādimadbhiḥ purābuddhaiḥ sattvānāṃ hitakāraṇāt || 38.2 ||
ap50.

Chapter A50

ap50.­1

5679atha khalu bhagavān vajrapāṇir yakṣasenāpatis tasyāṃ parṣadi sannipatito 'bhūt | sanniṣaṇṇaḥ • utthāyāsanād ekāṃśam uttarāsaṅgaṃ kṛtvā dakṣiṇaṃ jānumaṇḍalaṃ pṛthivyāṃ pratiṣṭhāpya sa yena bhagavāṃs tenāñjaliṃ praṇamya bhagavantam etad avocat || 50.1 ||

ap50.­2

yo hi bhagavan mañjuśriyā kumara­bhūtena krodharājā yamāntako nāma bhāṣitaḥ tasya kalpaṃ vistaraśo bhagavatā na prakāśitam | nāpi mañjuśriyā kumara­bhūtena | ahaṃ bhagavan paścimatā janatām avekṣya bhagavatā parinirvṛte śāsanāntardhānakālasamaye vartamāne mahābhairavakāle yugādhame sarvaśrāvakapratyeka­buddhavinirmukte buddhakṣetre tathāgataśāsanasaṃrakṣaṇārthaṃ dharmadhātucirasthityarthaṃ sarvaduṣṭarājñāṃ nivāraṇārthaṃ ratnatrayāpakāriṇāṃ nigrahārthaṃ vaineyasattvakauśalācintyabodhi­sattvacaryāparipūraṇārtham acintyasattvapāka-m-abhinirharaṇārthaṃ ca || 50.2 ||

ap51.

Chapter A51

ap51.­1

atha khalu vajrapāṇir guhyakādhipatiḥ sarvāvantaṃ mahāparṣanmaṇḍalam avalokya sarvāṃs tān śuddhāvāsopariniṣaṇṇān bhūtasaṅghān āmantrayate sma || 51.1 ||

ap51.­2

śṛṇvantu bhavanto mārṣā yamāntakasya krodharājasyāparimitabalaparākramasya durdāntadamakasya vaivasvatajīvitāntakarasya duṣṭasattvanigrahatatparasya mahābodhi­sattvasya mañjuśriyabhāṣitasya • ādau5691 tāvat paṭavidhānaṃ bhavati || 51.2 ||

ap51.­3
na tithir na ca nakṣatraṃ nopavāso vidhīyate |
arīṇāṃ bhaya5692 utpanne paṭam etaṃ likhāpayet || 51.3 ||
ap52.

Chapter A52

ap52.­1

atha khalu śāntamatir bodhisattvo mahā­sattvas tasminn eva parṣatsannipāte sannipatitaḥ sanniṣaṇṇo 'bhūt | utthāyāsanāt sarvabuddhaṃ praṇamya parṣanmaṇḍalamadhye sthitvā bhagavantaṃ śākya­muniṃ triḥ pradakṣiṇīkṛtya caraṇayor nipatya sa yena vajrapāṇir mahāyakṣasenāpatis tena vyavalokya vācam udīrayati sma || 52.1 ||

ap52.­2

atikrūras tvaṃ vajrapāṇe5790 yas tvaṃ sarvasattvānāṃ sattvopaghātikaṃ kāmopasaṃhitaṃ ca mantratantrāṃ bhāṣayase | na khalu bho jinaputra bodhisattvānāṃ mahā­sattvānām eṣa dharmaḥ | mahākaruṇāprabhāvitā hi mahābodhisattvā bodhi­sattvacārikāṃ carante | sarvasattvānām arthāya hitādhyāśayena pratipannā bhavabandhanān na mucyante || 52.2 ||

ap53.

Chapter A53

ap53.­1

atha khalu bhaga­vāñ śākya­munis tasmāt samādher vyutthāya mahāsāgaropamāyāṃ parṣanmaṇḍalaṃ dharmaṃ deśayamānaḥ sarvasattvānāṃ sarvabhūtagaṇānām agrataḥ sanniṣaṇṇās tatra vajrapāṇipramukhānām anekabodhisattvā6072sṅkhyeyasahasrāṃ śāriputrapramukhām anekāsaṅkheyārhatsahasrāṃ vaiśravaṇapramukhām asaṅkhyeyārcacāturmahārājikadeva­putrāṃ śakrapramukhāṃ trāyastriṃśām asaṅkhyeyadeva­putrāṃ suyāmasantuṣita­nirmāṇarati­paranirmita­vaśavarti­brahmakāyika­brahmapurohita­mahābrahma­parīttābhāpramāṇābhāsvarair yāvat puṇyaprasavā bṛhatphalāvṛhā6073tapākaniṣṭhā devān āmantrayate sma || 53.1 ||

ap54.

Chapter A54

ap54.­1

atha bhagavān śākya­muniḥ punar api śuddhāvāsabhavanam avalokya mañjuśriyaṃ kumara­bhūtam āmantrayate sma || 54.1 ||

ap54.­2

ayaṃ mañjuśrīḥ • dharma­paryāyaḥ • asmin sthāne pracariṣyati tatrāhaṃ6782 svayam evaṃ veditavyaḥ | sarvabodhi­sattvagaṇaparivṛtaḥ śrāvakasaṅghapuraskṛtaḥ sarvadeva­nāgayakṣagaruḍagandharvakinnaramahoragasiddhavidyādhara6783mānuṣāmānuṣaiḥ parivṛto vihare 'haṃ veditavyaḥ | tathāgato 'tra rakṣāvaraṇaguptaye tiṣṭhatīti || 54.2 ||

ap54.­3

daśānuśaṃsā mañjuśrīḥ kumāra veditavyāḥ6784 • yatra sthāne6785 'yaṃ dharmakośas tathāgatānāṃ pustakagato vā lekhayiṣyati6786 vācayiṣyati dhārayiṣyati satkṛtya manasikṛtya vividhaiś cāmaracūrṇa6787cchatradhvaja­patākāghaṇṭābhir vādyamālyavilepanair dhūpagandhaiś ca sugandhibhiḥ pūjayiṣyati mānayiṣyati satkariṣyaty ekāgramanaso vā cittaṃ dhatse | katame daśa || 54.3 ||


ab.

Abbreviations

Abbreviations Used in the Introduction and Translation

C Choné Kangyur
D Degé Kangyur
H Lhasa Kangyur
J Lithang Kangyur
K Kangxi Kangyur
L Shelkar Kangyur
MMK Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa
N Narthang Kangyur
Skt. Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa as it is represented in the appendix
TMK Tārāmūlakalpa
Tib. Tibetan text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa as witnessed in the Pedurma Kangyur
Y Yongle Kangyur

Abbreviations Used in the Appendix‍—Sources for the Sanskrit text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa (MMK)

Published editions
M Martin Delhey 2008
S Śāstrī 1920–25
V Vaidya 1964
Y Jayaswal 1934 (the section containing chapter 53 from Śāstrī’s edition of the MMK corrected by Rāhula Saṅkṛtyāyana)
Manuscripts
A NAK (National Archives, Kathmandu) accession no. 5/814
B NAK accession no. 3/303
MSS all manuscripts (as used for any given section of text)
R NAK accession no. 3/645
T manuscript accession no. C-2388 (Thiruvanantha­puram)
Tibetan sources
C Choné (co ne) Kangyur
D Degé (sde dge) Kangyur
H Lhasa (lha sa/zhol) Kangyur
J Lithang (li thang) Kangyur
K Kangxi (khang shi) Kangyur
N Narthang (snar thang) Kangyur
TMK Tibetan translation of the Tārāmūlakalpa (Toh 724)
Tib. Tibetan translation (supported by all recensions in the Pedurma Kangyur)
U Urga (phyi sog khu re) Kangyur
Y Yongle (g.yung lo) Kangyur
Critical apparatus
* text illegible (in a manuscript)
+ text reported as illegible in S, or in Delhey’s transcript of manuscript A
? text illegible (in a printed edition)
[] (square brackets) text hard to decipher (in a manuscript)
] right square bracket marks the lemma quoted from the root text
a.c. ante correctionem
conj. conjectured
em. emended
lac. lacunae in the text (physical damage to the manuscript)
m.c. metri causa
om. omitted
p.c. post correctionem
r recto
v verso
† (dagger) text unintelligible
• (middle dot) lack of sandhi or partial sandhi

n.

Notes

n.­1
Not to be confused with the division of the Buddhist canon of the same name.
n.­2
Cf. Wallis 2002, pp. 9–10. The canonical Chinese translation, done in at least two stages, dates to the 11th century (ib., p. 10).
n.­3
Jean Przyluski (Przyluski 1923, p. 301) wrote, “C’est une sorte d’encyclopédie qui traite, sous forme de sermons, des sujets les plus variés: iconographie, rituel, astrologie, etc…”
n.­4
In the MMK as a whole, there are more than 1,600 proper names, excluding place names.
n.­5
The accumulations are mentioned, e.g., in the passage: “There is, in the extensive manual of rites of Bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, an ocean-like chapter on useful practices whereby beings who have undertaken the complete practice of the mantra system [can perfect] the accumulations [required for the attainment of] awakening” (asti mañjuśriyaḥ kumārabhūtasya bodhisattvasya mahāsattvasya kalpavisare samudrā­paṭala­sādhanopayikaṃ sarvamantra­tantra­caryānupraviṣṭānāṃ sattvānāṃ bodhisambhārakāraṇam). The chapter that this quotation is taken from is not included in our translation, but is appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition (Śāstrī 1920-25, vol. 2, p. 384, lines 8–10).
n.­6
Comment left by Harunaga Isaacson at http://tibetica.blogspot.com/2008/11/in-window-of-sweet-shop.html.
n.­7
The number 55 is arbitrary inasmuch as this count includes only one of the two chapters, each specified in its colophon in the Trivendrum manuscript as “the thirty-fourth.” These two chapters are placed together in Śāstrī’s edition where they form chapter 36. Only the first of them is included in our translation. Also, another couple of chapters seem to have been created artificially, such as, e.g., “chapter” 55, appended in Śāstrī’s edition after the final chapter 54, where it clearly does not belong.
n.­8
Two sets of folio references have been included in this translation due to a discrepancy in volume 88 (rgyud ’bum, na) of the Degé Kangyur between the 1737 par phud printings and the late (post par phud) printings. In the latter case, an extra work, Bodhi­maṇḍasyālaṃkāra­lakṣa­dhāraṇī (Toh 508, byang chub snying po’i rgyan ’bum gyi gzungs), was added as the second text in the volume, thereby displacing the pagination of all the following texts in the same volume by 17 folios. Since the eKangyur follows the later printing, both references have been provided, with the highlighted one linking to the eKangyur viewer.
n.­9
byang chub sems dpa’ ’dus pa’i ’khor gyi tshogs Tib. The word “pavilion” is missing from the Tibetan. The Sanskrit word maṇḍala, taken here to describe “pavilion” (cf. Edgerton 1970, maṇḍalamāḍa, p. 416), is translated in the Tibetan as tshogs (“assembly”) and refers to the “congregation of bodhisattvas.”
n.­528
Om. Tib.
n.­529
“It also brings complete omniscience” om. Tib.
n.­604
shin tu bkrus pa D. The phrase “Tightly woven, thoroughly clean” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. has in this position “keeping the vow well.”
n.­605
kha tshar dang bcas pa dang / Tib. The phrase “fringe tassels” in the Tibetan or “fringe” (sadaśa) in the Skt. probably refers to the threads extending beyond the rectangle of the woven cloth on each of the four sides.
n.­611
rab tu gsang ba Y, K, N, H; rab tu gsungs pa D. Y, K, N, and H agree with the Sanskrit ºrahasya.
n.­612
khyod kyi N, H; khyod kyis D; N and H indicate that the “cloth-painting procedure” pertains specifically to Mañjuśrī.
n.­613
“Smallest” om. Tib.
n.­623
phung po lhag ma dang bcas pa’i mya ngan las ’das pa’i grong khyer du ’gro bar byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “that takes [them] to the citadel of nirvāṇa in which the aggregates remain.”
n.­624
byang chub sems dpa’ rnams kyi rgyud nges par byang chub sgrub par byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “that continuously causes them to always accomplish the awakening of all bodhisattvas.”
n.­625
bdag gi gsang sngags ’di Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This secret mantra of mine.”
n.­664
’jam dpal gzhon nu gang khyod kyis bstan pa’i sems can de dag gi phyir/ le’u’i cho ga rab ’byam ’di thabs sla bas ’grub par ’gyur ba ngas kyang bstan te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, I have taught the extensive chapter on the rite, a method that is easy to master, for the sake of those beings whom you foretold.”
n.­665
“I will speak for the benefit of all beings” om. Tib.
n.­717
klu rnams mthong ba yang don yod pa yin te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “this is effective in making the nāgas appear.”
n.­956
“Mantras” om. Tib.
n.­1021
The translation of this paragraph is partially based on the Tibetan and partially based on the Skt.
n.­1123
“Time” om. Tib.
n.­1295
The reference is made here to the immediately preceding chapter.
n.­1296
blo dang ldan pa gnod sbyin gyi bdag po lag na rdo rjes nga la dris nas/ ’jam dpal khyod kyi don thams cad bya ba’i las kyi le’u rab ’byam ’khor gyi dkyil ’khor gyi nang du rgya cher sngar bstan pa yin no/ D. This paragraph has been translated mainly from the Tibetan. In the Skt. it begins with “Listen, Mañjuśrī!” The clause “Requested by … in his hand” comes at the end of the paragraph and possibly serves to introduce the verse that follows. The Skt. also includes the phrase “I will [now] teach…” (future tense) which seems to clash with the past tense (“I taught”) of the immediately following section that sums up the previous chapter.
n.­1297
sngags kyi zlos pa bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to the Skt. kathitaṃ mantra­jāpinām (“[all this] was taught for/with reference to the mantra reciters”) translates as, “the recitation of mantras has been taught.”
n.­1359
From this chapter onward, the chapter numbers are out of step with those in the Tibetan translation. Chapters 18 to 23 in the Sanskrit text are not included in the Tibetan translation of the text and are not translated here.
n.­1487
kye kye gza’ dang rgyu skar kyi tshogs rnams khyed cag thams cad nyon cig Tib. “The planets and the nakṣatras” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
n.­1488
sngags dang / rgyud dang / dbang bskur ba dang / dkyil ’khor dang / D. The Tibetan reads the compound mantra­tantrābhiṣeka­maṇḍala as a dvandva that translates as, “the mantra, the tantra, the empowerment, and the maṇḍala.”
n.­1489
“Homa” om. Tib.
n.­1490
The grammar of this part, starting from “This sovereign,” is not very clear.
n.­1491
sems can ma rungs pa thams cad kyang dgag par gyis shig /bstan par gyis shig D. “Restrained/stopped” (roddhavyāni) is omitted in the Tibetan.
n.­1521
“Again” om. Tib.
n.­1522
“But now only briefly” om. Tib.
n.­1523
ras ris kyi tshad rgya che ba’i sbyor ba sgrub pa nyams par ’gyur bas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The practice of executing the painting in its extended version has degenerated.”
n.­1616
’jam dpal bstan pa ’di ni de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi nor du gyur pa/ chos kyi mdzod ’jig rten pa rnams kyi bsam pa ’bras bu dang bcas pa byed pa’i phyir nor bu rin po che lta bur gyur pa’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This teaching, Mañjuśrī, is the jewel of all the tathāgatas. This treasure chest of Dharma is like a wish fulfilling jewel because it brings the wishes of worldly beings to fruition.”
n.­1617
sems can thams cad kyi bsams pa yongs su rdzogs par bya ba’i phyir cho ga bzhin du bzas pa byas na thob pa yin no/ D. The phrase, “will fulfill the wishes of all beings” is based on the Tibetan, which translates as, “Since it can fulfill the wishes of all beings, if one has recited the mantra following the proper procedure, one will attain the result.” Sections of this line are not found in the Skt.
n.­1618
“Tathāgata-vidyārājas” must refer to other uṣṇīṣa kings‍—Sitātapatra, Tejorāśi, and so forth.
n.­1685
ras ris dang po Tib. In place of “in front of this painting,” the Tibetan has “this first painting.”
n.­1686
’di nyid kyi yi ge gcig pa’i snying po’i sngags sam yi ge drug po ma’i mtha’ can khyod kyi sngar bstan pa’i yi ge drug pa’i snying po’am dang po na oM yod pa’i yi ge gcig pa’i ras ris dang po ’di nyid kyi cho gar ’gyur ba ni phyi ma’i dus phyi ma’i tshe na D. It is not clear in the Skt. why the “one-syllable mantra” is mentioned twice and whether it is the same one-syllable mantra or not. The Tibetan translates as, “It will be the ritual of this first painting‍—whether it be this one’s single-syllable heart mantra, the six-syllable mantra ending with ma, your aforementioned six-syllable heart mantra, or the single-syllable mantra with oṃ first‍—that, at a later time in the future … /”
n.­1804
’jam dpal khyod kyi sngags dang rgyud dang rig pa’i rgyal po dang ’khor los sgyur ba la sogs pa dang de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi gtsug tor la sogs pa dang sngags thams cad kyi grub pa’i gnas yod de/ Tib. “Tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas,” here and elsewhere in the MMK, refers to the deities called uṣṇīṣa kings. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, there are places where one can accomplish your mantra system, the vidyādhara and cakravartin and the like, all of the tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas and the like, and all mantras.”
n.­1805
The word tathāgata has a feminine ending in the Skt. This could be either a corruption or could reflect the gender of vidyā (feminine).
n.­1877
rig pa thams cad la ’os pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they are applicable to all vidyās.”
n.­1899
A nirdeśa is a type of an explanatory text, usually on religious or philosophical matters.
n.­1900
’jam dpal khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po chos kyi dbyings kyi mdzod/ de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po/ chos kyi dbyings kyi rgyu mthun pa’i rjes su spyod pa/ mdo chen po’i mchog /rin po che’i le’u de bzhin gshegs pa’i gsang ba’i mchog rjes su gnang ba/ sngags kyi mchog sgrub pa la rgyu mtshan shes pa dang rtags dang dus gzhan shes pa’i sgrub pa’i thabs rnams nges par bstan cing yang dag par bstan no/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, your king of manuals is a treasury of the sphere of phenomena, the essence of the tathāgatas that proceeds in harmony with the sphere of phenomena and is supreme among the great sūtras. This precious chapter definitively and accurately teaches the authorization that is the supreme secret of the tathāgatas, understanding the reason for accomplishing the supreme mantra, and other methods for accomplishing knowledge of signs and times.”
n.­2238
khyod kyi phyag rgya D. “Root” is omitted in the Tibetan.
n.­2254
sems can thams cad kyi lam du gyur pa yin no/ D. The Tibetan includes an additional line here that translates as, “It has become the path of all beings.” The Tibetan and Skt. diverge at this point (Skt. 37.2.2, D. 276.b.1). The following is a list of the correspondences in material between the Tibetan and Skt. texts following the folio enumeration in the Rockwell Degé Kangyur:

D. 276.b.1–277.a.2 = Skt. 37.10–37.16.
D. 277.a.2–277.a.7 = Skt. 37.2.2–37.4.3 (Skt. 37.4.4–37.5.2 om. Tib.).
D. 277.a.7–277.b.2 = Skt. 37.5.3.4–37.9 (Skt. 37.8 om. Tib.).

The Tibetan text then begins to align again with the Skt. at D. 277.b.2, which corresponds to the material in Skt. 37.17.
n.­2456
As becomes clear later in this chapter, the association of the mudrā with whatever deity determines its position in the maṇḍala.
n.­2457
’jam dpal mdor na nyon cig phyag rgya’i mtshan nyid dang sngags rnams kyi rgya che ba dang dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga’i mdor bsdus pa dang dam tshig la rjes su ’jug cing phyag rgya’i gnas dang sngags thams cad dang rgyud de dag thams cad la gsang ba dang bcas pa’i dkyil ’khor ni/. The syntax and clause divisions in this paragraph are difficult to ascertain in the Skt., which makes the translation proposed here unreliable. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, listen to this brief explanation. The following is a summary of the features of the mudrās, the extensive mantras, and the maṇḍala procedure, acting in accord with the samaya and the arrangement of the mudrās, all of the mantras, and the maṇḍala that contains what is concealed in all of the tantras.”
n.­2458
sngags shes bdag nyid chen po dang / /yon tan kun kyang bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan syntax is obscure. One possible translation might be, “They also taught about great beings / Who are versed in mantra and all the good qualities.”
n.­2485
The chapter number jumps from 38 to 50 here because the chapters from 39 to 49 have been left out as they are missing from the Tibetan translation.
n.­2486
“Bowed” om. Tib.
n.­2487
de’i cho ga rgya che ba bcom ldan ’das kyi bka’ ma stsal la/ J, K; de’i cho ga rgya che ba bcom ldan ’das kyi bka’ stsal pa/ D. Following J and K, the Tibetan translates as, “the Blessed One has not explained the extensive ritual.”
n.­2540
gshin rje’i ’tsho ba mthar byed pa/ Tib. Here the Tibetan translates Vaivasvata following the standard Tibetan translation for Yama.
n.­2541
gtsor byed pa byang chub sems dpa’ ’jam dpal gyis smras pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “That was taught by the preeminent bodhisattva Mañjuśrī.”
n.­2605
“You are exceedingly cruel” om. Tib.
n.­2606
’khor ba’i ’ching ba las grol bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they liberate them from the bonds of cyclic existence.”
n.­2758
“From his samādhi” (literally, “from that samādhi”) is probably a reference to the samādhi called the buddha’s blessing through miraculous transformation that the Buddha had entered in 50.­4 above, i.e., at the beginning of the Yamāntaka section. This section ended at the conclusion of the previous chapter.
n.­3311
’jam dpal de bas na/ de ltar phyi ma’i tshe phyi ma’i dus su rigs kyi bu’am/ rigs kyi bu mo gang la las de bzhin gshegs pa rnams kyi chos kyi mdzod ’di glegs bam du chud par byas te/ ’dri bar ’gyur/ klog par ’gyur/ kha ton du byed par ’gyur ba’am glegs bam du byas te ’chang bar ’gyur/ gus par byas te yid la byed par ’gyur/ gos rnam pa sna tshogs dang / phye ma dang / gdugs dang / rgyal mtshan dang / ba dan dang / dril bu dang / rol mo dang / phreng ba dang / byug pa dang / spos dang / dri dang / dri zhim po dag gis mchod par byed par ’gyur/ ri mor byed par ’gyur/ yang dag par ’dzin par byed par ’gyur/ yid rtse gcig pa’i sems kyis chos byed par ’gyur ba de la ni/ phan yon bcu po ’di dag tu ’gyur te/ bcu gang zhe na/ D. The entire section started from Skt. 53.905c up to the beginning of this paragraph is missing from the Tibetan text. The Tibetan translation corresponding to Skt. 54.3 also differs somewhat and translates as, “Since that is the case, Mañjuśrī, at a later time in the future, the activities for any son or daughter of the lineage who has written this treasury of the Dharma of the tathāgatas down in a book; who copies it; reads it; chants it; makes it into a volume and then wears it; who reveres it and is focused on it; who worships it with various types of cloth, powders, parasols, victory banners, flags, bells, music, garlands, ointments, incense, perfumes, and sweet smells; who illustrates it; who upholds it perfectly; and who enacts its qualities with a singular focus will incur the following ten advantages.”
n.­3312
der ’di pha rol gyi dmag tshogs kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur/ char ’bab pa mi mkhas pa dang gza’ dang ’ching ba chen po’i ’tshe ba ’byung bar mi ’gyur/ mi ma yin pa’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la mi’i ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur/ phyir rgol ba thams cad kyi ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la nas kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /dus ma yin par ’chi ba’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la dus ma yin pa’i char gyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /char ches pa’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la rlung chen po’i dkyil ’khor gyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /sha za thams cad kyi ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la dgra’i ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /de bzhin du g.yon can rkun po’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la ’chi ba’i ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /gshin rje’i rgyal pos khyer ba’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la chom rkun gyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /lha thams cad dang klu dang gnod sbyin dang dri za’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la gzhan gyi sngags kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /sbyar ba’i dug thams cad kyi ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la nad kyi ’jigs pa dang / rims dang / tshad par ’khu ba dang / ma zhu ba dang / yan lag dang / nying lag gi nad kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan rendering of this list differs in its arrangement and content. The Tibetan translators marked each of the ten advantages in this list by using the phrase der ’di la, translated here as “then they will have” and “they will have.” The arrangement of these “ten advantages” (daśānuśaṃsā, phan yon bcu po) in this English translation follows the Tibetan translators’ organization of the passage, which can at times seem counterintuitive. The Tibetan translates as, “(1) Then they will have no fear of enemy armies, there will be no danger of drought, planetary influences, or great pestilence (mahāmārī, ’ching chen po), and they will have no fear of nonhuman beings; (2) They will have no fear of human beings or any opponents; (3) They will have no fear of sickness and no fear of premature death; (4) They will have no fear of unseasonal rains and no fear of floods; (5) They will have no fear of typhoons and no fear of any pīśacas; (6) They will have no fear of enemies, and likewise no fear of rogues and robbers; (7) They will have no fear of death and no fear of being carried off by the Lord of Death; (8) They will have no fear of bandits and no fear of any of the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, and gandharvas; (9) They will have no fear of the mantras of other sects and no fear of any poison they might consume; (10) They will have no fear of sickness, fever, contracting dysentery, indigestion, or diseases that affect the major and minor limbs of the body.”
n.­3313
phan yon bcu po ’di dag tu shes bar bya’o/ /gang du de bzhin gshegs pa rnams kyi cho ga chen po rab ’byam chos kyi mdzod ’di glegs bam du byas te/ bzhag la ’dri ba dang / klog pa dang / mchod pa dang / ’dzin pa dang kha ton du byed na de bzhin gshegs pa rnams kyis shin tu bzung zhing chos kyi mdzod mngon du ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should know that these are the ten advantages. Wherever this treasury of Dharma, this extensive manual of the tathāgatas, has been made into a book, if one sets it down and copies it, reads it, worships it, upholds it, and chants it, one will be embraced by the tathāgatas and the treasury of Dharma will manifest.”
n.­3314
This sentence is missing from the Tib.
n.­3315
The Tib. does not mention the master (ācārya).
n.­3316
’dis ni thams cad mtshon pa yin na sems can rnams kyi dran pa med par ma byed cig D. The last two sentences are missing from the Tibetan. The alternate reading in the Tibetan here translates as, “Since this manual illustrates everything, beings must not forget it.”
n.­3317
’on kyang khyod kyis shes par ’gyur mchod pa byed par ’gyur yang dag par ’dzin par ’gyur zhing bsod nams chen po yang rab tu skye bar ’gyur ro/ /sems can skal ba med pa rnams la bstan par mi bya ste/ /gzhan du na dbul ba dang / nad dang / mdze dang / ’tshe ba dang / ’go ba’i nad nyid byed par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan for the first part of this paragraph translates as, “However, you should understand it, worship it, enact it, perfectly uphold it, and you will produce a great deal of merit. Do not teach it to unfortunate beings or it will cause poverty, illness, leprosy, injury, and infectious diseases. That is why you should not teach it to others.”
n.­3318
bsam gtan la rab tu zhugs pa dang Tib. In place of “who keep their samaya concerning the sense bases and psychophysical elements,” the Tibetan translates as, “who have penetrated samādhi,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *°samādhyanupraveśa° instead of the extant Skt. °samayānupraveśa°.
n.­3319
bcom ldan ’das chis kyi rnam grangs ’di’i min ci zhes bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Blessed One, what is the name of this Dharma discourse?” This indicates that the Tibetan translators understood the Skt. nāma not as a term indicating emphasis but as “name.”
n.­3320
byang chub sems dpa’i spyod pa’i rjes su ’jug pa rgyud thams cad kyi mdzod ces bya bar yang zung shig D. The Tibetan translates as, “You should remember it as the treasury of all of the systems of engaging in bodhisattva conduct.”
n.­3321
theg pa chen po shin tu rgyas pa nges par bstan pa nyams pa med pa zhes bya bar yang zung shig /byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod ces bya bar yang zung shig Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “You should remember it as the unparalleled exceedingly vast and definitive Great Vehicle teaching.” The Tibetan then adds a line that is absent from the Skt. that translates as, “You should remember it as a bodhisattva basket.”
n.­3322
drang don mdo yis yongs su brgyan/ D. “The meaning that needs to inferred” (Skt. neyārtha, Tib. drang don) refers to a hermeneutic for the heirarchical arrangment of sūtra texts and teachings that was perhaps most famously set forth in the Saṃdhi­nirmocana­sūtrahttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh106.html, where the term neyārtha/drang don refers to teachings that require further interpretation and the term nītārtha/nges don refers to definitive teachings that require no further interpretation.
n.­3323
theg pa rnam gsum bdag po dang / Tib. This pāda has been translated based on the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *tridhāyāna­patis (“lord of the three vehicles”) instead of the extant Skt. tridhā jana­gatis (“threefold human destiny”?).
n.­3324
“Thieves” om. Tib.
n.­3325
This verse seems to be missing one pāda in both the Skt. and the Tib.
n.­3326
“Music” om. Tib.
n.­3327
sangs rgyas sku mdog thob par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One will obtain the complexion of a buddha,” which reflects the Sanskrit *buddha­varṇitām instead of the extant Skt. buddha­vartitām.
n.­3328
The Tibetan skips the remainder of this list of articles and jumps to “The merit thus obtained” in MMK 37.26 below.
n.­3329
sngags dang rgyud don drang ba’i don/ /don yod tshig ni rab bshad pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The provisional meaning of the goal of the mantra system / Is perfectly explained [in these] meaningful verses.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *mantra­tantrārthaṃ neyārthaṃ instead of the extant Skt. mantrān tattvārtha­neyārthaṃ.
n.­3330
chom rkun nad ni gzhan dag dang / me yi ’jigs pa de la med/ /rgyal po skye bo dag kyang rung / /su zhig de la mchod mi byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will have no fear of robbers, / Illness, fire, and other things. / Whether he be a king or ordinary person, / They will not affect whoever worships it.”
n.­3331
rgyal po rgyal rigs spyi bo nas/ /dbang bskur yul du nyer gnas tshe/ /mdo sde mgo la nges bcings nas/ /yang dang yang du phyag ’tshal na/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to Skt. 54.40cd–41 translates as, “When a kṣatriya king receives the crown / Consecration and rules a country, / And this sūtra is held above his head / And worshiped again and again, / Bandits will not trouble him, and / He will not be slain by a weapon.”
n.­3332
The epithet kumāra (“the divine or princely youth”) seems to refer to Kārttikeya the god of war, as he is described here as sitting on a peacock seat. Since Kārttikeya is also an emanation of the “divine youth” Mañjuśrī, this epithet should perhaps be understood as referring here to both Mañjuśrī and Kārttikeya.
n.­3333
ser dang dngul dang ra gan gis/ /rgyal mtshan yu ba bsgreng ba la/ /rgyal mtshan ba dan gtags nas ni/ /legs dgad legs par mnyam par bzhag D. The Tibetan translates as, “The banner should be hoisted by a handle / Made of gold, silver, and brass, / The flag should be attached to the banner, and / They should be prominently displayed and evenly distributed.”
n.­3334
rgyal mtshan sgreng la gnas pa yi/ /gzhon nu las ni sna tshogs pa/ /rnam pa du ma’i gzugs dang ldan/ /bdag nyid chen po ’jam pa’i dbyangs/ /sa bcu’i bdag po’i bdag po ni/ /mthong ba tsam gyis ’jigs par byed/ D. The material in 54.­46-49 above is reduced to just six pādas in the Tibetan that translate as, “They will be terrified by the mere sight / Of the divine youth with his various actions / And his various forms, / The great being Mañjuśrī / Emblazoned on a hoisted banner.”
n.­3335
It is not clear who this king is, as his story seems to peter out in the very next verse, unless he is an avatar or a previous incarnation of Indra, who seeks, further down in the text, help from Kāśyapa.
n.­3336
grub par ’dod pas rab tu bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who acted out of a desire for attainment,” reflecting the Sanskrit *siddhi° instead of the extant Skt. sandhi°.
n.­3337
brgya byin Tib. The Tibetan specifies that the subject is Śakra/Indra here. The term śacīpatiḥ (“Śacī’s husband”), an epithet of Indra, appears below in Skt. 54.56b, allowing us to identify the subject of the Skt. verse as Indra as well.
n.­3338
lha dang lha min sngon g.yul ’thab/ /pha rol ’jigs pa byung ba na/ /gang tshe brgya byin sngon gyur pa/ /dpung ni pham byas zhes sdang bas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Long ago a battle raged between the gods and asuras, / When Indra became frightened / By the opposition (as he had before), / And his army was defeated by the enemy.”
n.­3339
de tshe gcig tu song nas ni/ /sa steng rnam par du bar gyur/ Tib. “He wandered the earth alone / And wept.” Before the emendation, the first stanza in the Skt. actually translates as, “The beings were at that time alone” (ekākinas tadā sattvā[ḥ]).
n.­3340
de skad bcom ldan gsol nas ni/ Tib. In place of “god of bounty” (maghavān), the Tibetan translates as, “Blessed One” (bhagavān).
n.­3341
“God of Bounty” (Maghavan) and “one who has performed one hundred sacrifices” (Śatakratu) are epithets of Indra.
n.­3342
“Thousand-eyed” (sahasradṛk) and Kauśika, again, are epithets of Indra.
n.­3343
rnyed dka’ sku ni ’bum gyur pa/ D. In place of “endowed with one hundred thousand powers,” the Tibetan translates as, “having one hundred thousand bodies.” The Skt. could also be interpreted as “having the strength of one hundred thousand [men].”
n.­3344
Maghavan (“God of Bounty”) is another name of Indra. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *bhagavān (“Blessed One”) instead of the extant Skt. maghavān.
n.­3345
de nas de ni de dran npas/ /byang chub sems dpa’ dran tsam gyis/ /gzhon nu sna tshogs gzugs can ni/ /der ni de yi mod la lhags/ /der ni bcom ldan ’das dang ni/ /bcom ldan lha yi dbang phyug bcas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “So he recollected him, and / Simply by recollecting the bodhisattva / The youthful prince with a universal form / Immediately came to that place / Where Blessed [Kāśyapa] was / Along with the Blessed Lord of the Gods.”
n.­3346
lhags nas byang chub sems dpa’ des/ Tib. The subject “The bodhisattva [Mañjuśrī]” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “he pronounced the mantras,” which seems premature at this point in the narrative.
n.­3347
The mantra proper (beginning with oṁ) is in the Skt.: oṁ hana hana sarva­bhayān sādayotsādaya trāsaya moṭaya chinda bhinda jvala jvala huṁ huṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā.
n.­3348
de nas lha ma yin thams cad rgya mtsho chen po’i mtha’i ’gram du gang rang khyer gang yin pa der mngon du phyogs shing song bar gyur te/ sems zhum zhing nyams la dpung gi ’jigs pas sems dkrags shing gdong gi mdog nyams shing nga rgyal dang dregs pa la sogs pa dang bral bar gyur la/ mtshon cha dang bral zhing ri ’bigs byed ’bar ba bzhin du lha’i dbang phyug de mthong nas byer bar gyur to/ D. The material in the Tibetan after the phrase translated here as “[h]e mounted his chariot and rode to where all of the asuras were,” differs from the Skt. and translates as, “Then all the asuras turned toward the area where their own city was on the shore at the edge of the great ocean and left. Disheartened and concerned out of fear that the battle was lost, the color drained from their faces and they lost all pride, confidence, and the like. They dropped their weapons, gazed upon the lord of the gods who looked like the blazing Vindhya mountains, and were routed.”
n.­3349
de nas lha rnams kyi dbang po brgya byin *gyis chen po la ’od pa’i nor bu rin po che nang ’od dang ldan zhing gsal ba’i phreng ba blangs nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Śakra, Lord of the Gods, picked up a garland that was luminous and possessed the inner radiance of an extremely valuable precious gem.” *This translation follows the variant brgya byin gyi preserved in J and C.
n.­3350
mi ma yin pa’i grangs kyis bgrang bar D. The Tibetan translates as “according to the reckoning of nonhuman beings,” reflecting the Sanskrit *amānuṣikayā gaṇanayā instead of the extant Skt. mānuṣikayā gaṇanā.
n.­3351
“Qualities” is missing from the Tib.
n.­3352
de bzhin du phan yon gyi yon tan mchog ’di dag rgya che ba dang / mtha’ yas shing mu med pa sngon gsungs pa yin no/ Tib. The last clause is unclear in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus these supreme advantageous qualities were previously described as exceedingly vast, infinite, and limitless.”
n.­3353
ci ste blo chung ba gang gis chos ’di ni thub pa mchog dang / thub pa’i sras blo dang ldan pa ma yin no/ /zhes rab tu spong bar byed do/ D. The Tibetan renders this material in prose and translates as, “And so a feeble-minded person who rejects it, saying, ‘This is not the teaching of the intelligent Sage and the Sage’s heirs.’ ”
n.­3354
de nyams nas ni dud ’gror ’gro/. The Tibetan translates as, “After experiencing that they will be reborn as animals.” The translation of de nyams nas as “[a]fter experiencing that” is tentative. The term might also refer to the deterioration (nyams) of the karma that led to these beings’ rebirth in the hell realms.
n.­3355
me ma mur D. In place of Gūthamṛttikā, the Tibetan has Kukūla, which is a different hell.
n.­3356
de nas phyir yang spu gri sor/ Tib. This pāda appears to be corrupt. Jvaradhāra (a current of fever?) is an unlikely name of a hell. The Tibetan repeats the Kṣuradhārā hell here that was already mentioned in the previous verse.
n.­3357
yang nga kyi hud zer de bzhin/ Tib. It is not clear whether Avava is the name of a hell. The Tibetan reflects the reading athavā instead.
n.­3358
ma dad sems kyis chos spangs pa/ /sdig pa’i las can gnas yin te/ D. The translation of this half-stanza is problematic. The Tibetan translates as “Is the place for evil beings / Who have rejected the Dharma due to their lack of faith.”
n.­3359
In the original text, this line constitutes pāda “b” of the next verse.
n.­3360
kun gyi mthar thug mnar med pa/ /de nyams de bzhin dmyal chen skye/ Tib. In the original text, this line constitutes the last pāda of the previous verse. The Skt. has been emended, but the meaning remains unclear. The Tibetan for the last two pādas translates as, “Experiencing Avīci, the lowest of all of the hells, / Is like being born in a vast hell realm.”
n.­3361
mdo sde de ni rgya cher bcas/ /chos kyi nor kun rab spangs nas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who completely reject the Dharma jewel / With its vast and profound sūtras.”
n.­3362
de ni ’jig rten ngan par ’gro/ /dbang med rtag par dbang du ’gro/ D. This verse, which has only three pādas in the Skt., is reduced to just two pādas in the Tibetan that translate as, “Will take a low rebirth in the world, / Be powerless, and always be controlled.”
n.­3363
The Skt. actually begins with a phrase that translates as, “Anyone who [rejects] this sūtra,” but the description of the sūtra that follows is too long to replicate in the English translation the Sanskrit syntax, which is resolved only in the second half-stanza of 54.­84 below.
n.­3364
grub pa sna tshogs brgya rnams ’thob/ /yang dag mtha’ ni sgrib pa med/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will attain hundreds of various types of siddhis / And the ultimate state and be free from afflictions.”
n.­3365
phun tshogs Tib. Instead of samyak (“duly,” “properly”), the Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *sampad (“good fortune”).
n.­3366
rtag dang chad dang thog mtha’ ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Eternalism, nihilism, beginning and end,” reflecting the Sanskrit *śāśvatocchedam ādyantam instead of the extant Skt. śāśvatocchedam­adhyāntam.
n.­3367
le’u rab ’byam rab gsungs pa/ /nges pa’i mdo sde bzang po yin/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is based on the Tibetan. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *nītasūtrārtha° (“sūtra of definitve meaning”) instead of the extant Skt. nīlasūtrānta°.
n.­3368
The seventh sage is the Buddha Śākyamuni.
n.­3369
Paṭala usually means a chapter or section of a book, but it can also mean, as seems to be the case here, the complete work.
n.­3370
rtsa ba rab ’byams le’u zhes/ /sngags dang rgyud dang ldan pa de/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is called the ‘extensive source text’ / That contains the mantra system.”
n.­3371
de ni mnar med dmyal bar ’gro/ /bskal pa chen por de ’tshed ces/ /rnam pa du mar dbye bar bstan/ Tib. The last pāda has been partially reconstructed based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. appears incomplete. The Tibetan also adds, “He will be roasted for a great eon.”
n.­3372
lkugs shing ’on pa yan lag nyams/ /blo nyams long ba nyid dang ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be mute, deaf, crippled, / Dumb, and blind.”
n.­3373
gos ngan D. “Poorly clothed” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt., which is probably corrupt, translates as, “skilled” (kuśala).
n.­3374
This verse is missing from the Tib., where some parts of it appear in the next verse.
n.­3375
mdo sde ’di ni rab spangs na/ /gang dang gang gis ’gro bar ’gro/ /de dang der ni skye ba na/ /blo ngan rmongs par skye bar ’gyur/. The second half-stanza of the Skt. has been reconstructed conjecturally. The Tibetan of this verse differs significantly and translates as, “If one rejects this sūtra, / Wherever one is reborn, / When one takes rebirth there, / One will be an idiotic and deluded being.”
n.­3376
Skt. 54.96 om. Tib.
n.­3377
“Folded his hands” om. Tib.
n.­3378
de la bcom ldan ’das ma ’ongs pa’i dus na sems can mi rigs pa’i chags pas zil gyis non pa slu bar byed pa nga rgyal can ma dad pa gya gyu can dmu rgod tshul khrims ’chal pa dag ’byung bar ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Blessed One, in the future beings will be overcome by illogical attachment, disagreeable, proud, faithless, dishonest, unruly, and undisciplined.”
n.­3379
sngags dang / spyod pa dang / D. The Tibetan treats “mantra” and “conduct” as two separate items on this list.
n.­3380
The Skt. term dharmadhātu (“the sphere of phenomena”) can also mean a buddha.
n.­3381
Although it is difficult to determine in the vague BHS language of this mantra, the gender here seems feminine. The Skt. uses the form kumārarūpiṇi, which is the vocative of kumārarūpiṇī (“you (feminine) with the form of the divine youth”). This would be in line with the preceding commentary that one uses this mantra to invoke, at the time of death, the form (mūrti, which is feminine in Skt.) of the dharmadhātu, which is Mañjuśrī. As this mantra is a vidyā, this also makes it likely that a female entity is addressed here. The epithet, viśvasambhava (“omnifarious”), could be a vocative form (viśvasambhave before sandhi) of the feminine form viśvasambhavā.
n.­3382
Hūṁ hūṁ om. Tib.
n.­3383
The part of the mantra jinajit • mañjuśrīya suśriya is difficult to interpret. Like the first part of the mantra, this part could be addressing the same feminine entity. One can expect, in this position, vocatives addressing the deity, but this doesn’t seem to be Mañjuśrī, at least not addressed directly. The form suśriya could be the BHS vocative of the feminine suśriyā (“exquisite splendor”), and mañjuśrīya, the corresponding adjective derived from mañjuśrī. The form jinajit could likewise be taken as feminine.
n.­3384
a mr-i tod+b+ha ba ba/ D. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *amṛtodbhava instead of the extant Skt. amṛtodbhavodbhava.
n.­3385
The mantra proper (starting from oṁ) is in the Skt.: oṁ kumāra­rūpiṇe viśva­sambhava āgacchāgaccha | lahu lahu bhrūṃ bhrūṃ hūṁ hūṁ jinajit • mañjuśrīye suśriye tāraya māṃ sarva­duḥkhebhyaḥ phaṭ phaṭ śamaya śamaya | amṛtodbhavodbhava­pāpaṃ me nāśaya svāhā ||.
n.­3386
rig pa’i rgyal po thams cad gzengs stod par byed pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It excites all of the vidyārājas,” reflecting the Sanskrit *samuttejanaṃ instead of the extant Skt. sattejanaṃ.
n.­3387
gshin rje’i ’jig rten dang / /dmyal ba’i sems can thams cad kyi sdug bsngal rab tu sbyangs shing / Tib. “The worlds of Yama,” in this context, probably include the hell realms, and the Tibetan includes an explicit reference to the hell realms here.
n.­3388
bde ba rnams kyang rab tu thob par ’gyur la/ Tib. The Tibetan adds a line that translates as, “and they all attained all manner of happiness.”
n.­3389
I.e., at the time of death.
n.­3390
sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das kyi sangs rgyas dang / chos ni bsam gyis mi khyab ste/ bsam pa’am/ gzhal ba’am/ spang bar ni bdag gis ji zhig nus te/ sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das nyid kyis mkhyen par ’gyur ro/ D. This‍—the final‍—paragraph of the MMK is probably spoken by Śākyamuni, who voices a reflection that each and every reader should make for him/herself, so it is in the first person. The meaning of these lines, however, is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as, “The buddhahood of the blessed buddhas and their Dharma are inconceivable. How could I be able to contemplate, evaluate, or reject them? Only the buddhas, the blessed ones, understand.” Both interpretations seem possible, given the vagueness of the grammar.
n.­3391
le’u sum cu rtsa drug pa D. The Tibetan translations of this text record this as chapter 36.
n.­3392
The contents of the final part of this chapter indicate that it was intended as the last. The Trivandrum manuscript, however, which is the only complete manuscript of the MMK, includes one other chapter after this. This additional chapter, however, lacks the standard opening and, as far as its contents, seems to be out of place at the end of the work.
n.­3393
“Above the Pure Abode” or “in the sky (gaganatale) above the Pure Abode,” as specified at the beginning of the text, is the venue for the teaching of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa.
n.­3394
The name Mahā­sthāna­prāpta is followed in the text by Mahāsthāna, which probably is the short version of the same name.
n.­3395
bcom ldan ’das kyis de skad ces bka’ stsal nas/ dge slong de dag dang / byang chub sems dpa’ de dag dang / thams cad dang ldan pa’i ’khor de dag dang/ gnas gtsang ma’i steng na gnas pa’i lha’i bu’i tshogs rnams dang / sems can bye ba khri phrag brgya stong du ma dang / lha dang / klu dang / gnod sbyin dang / dri za dang / lha ma yin dang / nam mkha’ lding dang / mi ’am ci dang / lto ’phye chen po dang / grub pa dang / rig ’dzin dang / drang srong mchog dam pa du ma dang / ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa dang / spyan ras gzigs dang / byams pa dang / mthu chen thob dang / mthu chen gnas dang / phyag na rdo rje la sogs pa byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’ chen po rnams dang / ’jig rten gyi khams grangs med pa dang / chos kyi dbyings mtha’ yas pa na bzhugs pa’i sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das nyan thos dang / rang sangs rgyas kyi ’khor dang bcas pa dang / sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das nam mkha’i ngo bo dang ’dra bar bzhugs pa’i sangs rgyas dang / byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’ chen po bsam gyis mi khyab pa rnams thugs rangs te/ bcom ldan ’das kyis gsungs pa la mngon par bstod do/ /. This paragraph is omitted in the Skt. and has been supplied in its entirety from the Tibetan.
n.­3396
’phags pa ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud rdzogs so// // D. In the Sanskrit text, this colophon comes after the next chapter, which is missing from the Tibetan translation and has been, likewise, omitted here. The omitted chapter, however, which is the final one in the Trivandrum manuscript, seems to have been appended at the end due to redactory confusion, as its contents indicate that it was not intended as the final. The final colophon, therefore, belongs here. The Tibetan translates as, “This concludes Mañjuśrī’s Root Tantra.”
n.­3397
dpal lha btsan po lha btsun pa byang chub ’od kyi bkas/ rgya gar gyi mkhan po dge bsnyen chen po ku mA ra ka la sha dang / sgra sgyur gyi lo ts+tsha ba dge slong shAkya blo gros kyis bsgyur cing zhus te gtan la phab pa’o// //.
n.­3398
Cf. bibliography.
n.­3399
oṁ] B; om. S
n.­3400
māḍe] S; māṇḍe B
n.­3401
bhavanto] B; om. S
n.­3402
mañjuśriyaḥ] B; mañjuśriyasya S
n.­3403
°rddhi°] em.; °riddhi° B; °śuddhi° S
n.­3404
ārogyaiśvaryaṃ] B; ārogyaiś carya° S
n.­3405
°paripūrakāṇi] B; °pāpāripūrakāṇi S
n.­3406
te] S; śṛṇu ca sādhu bhagavān iti B
n.­4349
paṭalavisarāt] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); paṭalavisaraḥ S
n.­4350
°bīja°] em.; °bījam S
n.­4427
āmantrayate] em.; āmantrayeta S
n.­4498
The MMK text seems to favor the spelling sādhanopayika rather than sādhanopāyika.
n.­4509
sādhanopāyikaṃ] em.; sādhakamopayikaṃ S
n.­4521
ārabhet] em.; ārabhe S
n.­4522
°puṣpānāṃ] conj.; °puṣpāṃ S
n.­4723
punar api] em. (supported by D); punar api punar api S
n.­4724
tvadīya°] conj. M; tvadīyaṃ S
n.­4725
°upacaryā°] em. (M); °opacaryā° S
n.­4726
This entire paragraph is missing from A.
n.­4727
Here resumes the correspondence with manuscript A.
n.­4728
uttiṣṭha] S; tiṣṭha tiṣṭha A
n.­4832
°sarvārtha] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °sarvathā S
n.­4907
avalokya] em.; alokya S
n.­4908
tadā] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); mudā S
n.­4928
°ākṛṣṭavān] em.; °ākṛṣṭavā S
n.­4945
From this chapter onward, the chapter numbers here are out of step with those in the Tibetan version. Chapters 18 to 23 are missing from the Tibetan text and have been left out of the Sanskrit edition here.
n.­4946
grahān] em.; grahāṇ R; grahaṇ° S
n.­4947
°svavākyaṃ] S; °svākṣaṃ R
n.­4948
nirdeśayituṃ] S; vavidarśayituṃ R
n.­4949
sādhayantu] S; sādhitu R
n.­4950
samaye ca tiṣṭhantu bhavantaḥ] R; om. S
n.­5305
°vidhānaṃ | na ca] em.; °vidhāna nica S
n.­5321
siddhiṃ] em.; siddhiḥ S
n.­5366
°akṣareṇa] em.; °ākṣareṇa S
n.­5397
saptamaṃ] A; saptamaḥ S
n.­5398
yo] S; ye A
n.­5399
sādhayiṣyati] A; sādhayiṣyanti S
n.­5400
saphalā sukhodayā sukhavipākā] A; saphalāḥ sukhodayāḥ sukhavipākāḥ S
n.­5401
°nivāraṇīyā] S; °nivāraṇi A
n.­5402
tasya bodhiparāyaṇīyā] S; tasyā vādhiparāyaṇi A
n.­5436
sedhiṣyate] conj. (on the authority of the Tib.); 'sya trasyati (unmetrical) S
n.­5450
yasyedānīṃ] em.; yasyedānī S
n.­5477
samanupraveśaṃ] em.; samanupraveśa° S
n.­5487
nirdeśa°] em.; nirdiśa° S
n.­5488
°vara°] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °vadha° S
n.­5527
°mantraṃ] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °tantraṃ S
n.­5528
puṇyākāme] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); puṇyakāme S
n.­5529
anabhiṣikte] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); avabhiṣikta S
n.­5619
saṃyojyaṃ] em.; saṃyojya S
n.­5670
Śāstrī, who rendered this paragraph in verse, indicates a missing pāda at this point. The passage, however, seems to be in prose, as corroborated by the Tibetan, with no text missing.
n.­5671
sarvatantreṣu] conj. (based on the Tib.); sarvamantreṣu S
n.­5679
The number here jumps from 38 to 50 because chapters from 39 to 49 have been left out as they are missing from the Tibetan translation.
n.­5691
ādau] A; mahābodhi­sattvasyādau S
n.­5692
bhaya] A; bhayam S
n.­5790
vajrapāṇe] em.; vajrapāṇeḥ S
n.­6072
°bodhisattvā°] Y; °bodhi­sattva° S
n.­6073
°āvṛhā°] em.; °ātṛhā° S
n.­6782
tatrāhaṃ] em.; tatrāha S
n.­6783
°vidyādhara°] em.; °vidyādharaḥ S
n.­6784
veditavyāḥ] em.; veditavyaḥ S
n.­6785
sthāne] em.; sthāno S
n.­6786
lekhayiṣyati] em.; likhyati S
n.­6787
°cūrṇa°] em. (on the authority of the Tib.); °pūrṇa°

b.

Bibliography

Source Texts (Sanskrit)

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the National Archives, Kathmandu (Bir 157), accession no. 3/303. Microfilmed by NGMPP, reel A 136/11. Bears the title Mañjuśrī­jñāna­tantra.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the National Archives, Kathmandu, accession no. 5/814. Microfilmed by NGMPP, reel A 39/04.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the National Archives, Kathmandu (Bir 45), accession no. 3/645. Microfilmed by NGMPP, reel A 124/14.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in the Oriental Research Institute and Manuscripts Library, Thiruvanantha­puram, accession no. C-2388.

Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Manuscript in Tokyo University Library, no. 275 in Matsunami’s catalog (Matsunami 1965).

Śāstrī, T. Gaṇapati, ed. The Āryamañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Vols 1–3. Trivandrum Sanskrit Series 70, 76, and 84. Trivandrum: Superintendent Government Press, 1920–25.

Vaidya, P. L., ed. Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Mahāyāna­sūtra­saṃgraha, Part II. Buddhist Sanskrit Texts 18. Darbhanga: The Mithila Institute of Postgraduate Studies and Research in Sanskrit Learning, 1964.

Source Texts (Tibetan)

’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud (Mañjuśrī­mūla­tantra). Toh. 543, Degé Kangyur vol. 88 (rgyud ’bum, na), folios 105.a–351.a.

’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud (Mañjuśrī­mūla­tantra). bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–2009. vol. 88, pp. 354–1051.

ral pa gyen brdzes kyi rtog pa chen po (Tārāmūlakalpa). Toh. 724, Degé Kangyur vol. 93 (rgyud ’bum, tsa), folios 205.b–311.a, continued in vol. 94 (rgyud ’bum, tsha), folios 1.b–200.a.

Secondary Sources

Agrawala, V. S. “The meaning of Kumārī Dvīpa.” Sārdha-Śatābdī: Special Volume of Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bombay (June 1959): 1–5.

Bunce, Fredrick W. Mudrās in Buddhist and Hindu Practices: An Iconographic Consideration. New Delhi: D. K. Printworld, 2005.

Delhey, Martin. (forthcoming). Early Buddhist Tantra: New Light on the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa from Manuscript Evidence. (forthcoming).

Delhey, Martin. (2008). Three unpublished handouts made for the First International Workshop on Early Tantra, Kathmandu, 2008, containing editions of chapters 12, 13, and 51 of the MMK, based on the NAK manuscript accession no. 5/814, reel A 39/04.

Delhey, Martin. (2012). “The Textual Sources of the Mañjuśriya­mūla­kalpa (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa), With Special Reference to Its Early Nepalese Witness NGMPP A39/4.” Journal of the Nepal Research Centre Vol. XIV (2012): 55–75.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. The Ratnaketu Dhāraṇī (Ratna­ketu­dhāraṇī, Toh 138). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2023). The Queen of Incantations: The Great Peahen (Toh 559). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Edgerton, Franklin. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1970.

Gray, David B. The Cakrasaṃvara Tantra (The Discourse of Śrī Heruka). A Study and Annotated Translation. New York: American Institute of Buddhist Studies, Columbia University, 2007.

Hartzell, James F. “The Buddhist Sanskrit Tantras: ‘The Samādhi of the Plowed Row.’ ” Pacific World: Journal of the Institute of Buddhist Studies 14 (Fall 2012): 63–178.

Jayaswal, K. P. An Imperial History of India in a Sanskrit Text (c. 700 B.C.–c. 770 A.D.) with a Special Commentary on Later Gupta Period. Lahore: Motilal Banarsidass, 1934.

Matsunaga, Yūkei. “On the date of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa.” In Tantric and Taoist Studies in Honour of R. A. Stein, edited by M. Strickmann. Vol. 3: Mélanges chinois et bouddhiques 22, 882–894. Brussels: Institut belge des hautes études chinoises, 1985.

Matsunami, Seiren. A Catalogue of the Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Tokyo University Library. Tokyo: Suzuki Research Foundation, 1965.

Mical, Wiesiek, and Paul Thomas. “Do Kriyā Tantras Have a Doctrine? ‍— The Case of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa.” Unpublished manuscipt, 2017. https://ku-np.academia.edu/wiesiekmical.

Przyluski, Jean. “Les Vidyārāja, contribution à l’histoire de la magie dans les sectes Mahāyānistes.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 23 (1923): 301–18.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2018), trans. The King of Samādhis Sūtra (Samādhi­rāja­sūtra, Toh 127). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2021a), trans. The Stem Array (Gaṇḍavyūha, chapter 45 of the Avataṃsakasūtra, Toh 44). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2021b), trans. The Ten Bhūmis (Daśabhūmika, Toh 44-31). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan (2023), trans. The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (1) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, Toh 555). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Saṅkṛtyāyana, Rāhula. “The text of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, corrected with the help of the Tibetan text.” In An Imperial History of India in a Sanskrit Text (c. 700 B.C.–c. 770 A.D.) with a Special Commentary on Later Gupta Period by K. P. Jayasawal, addendum 1–75. Lahore: Motilal Banarsidass, 1934.

Wallis, G. Mediating the Power of Buddhas: Ritual in the Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa. Albany: State University of New York Press, 2002.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

Ābha

Wylie:
  • kun nas ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • ābha

One of the tathāgatas attending the delivery of the MMK.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­39
g.­2

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

A class of gods.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­167
g.­3

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­155
  • 5.­8
  • 53.­1
g.­20

ācārya

Wylie:
  • slob dpon
Tibetan:
  • སློབ་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • ācārya

See “master.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­202-203
  • 28.­18
  • n.­492
  • n.­3315
  • g.­1023
g.­22

accomplishment

Wylie:
  • dngos grub
Tibetan:
  • དངོས་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhi

Accomplishment or success in general, as well as any particular magical power or ability. In the latter sense, eight are traditionally enumerated, namely the siddhi of the magical sword, of an eye ointment that renders invisible, etc. The content of the list may vary from source to source.

Located in 267 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­31
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­66
  • 1.­118
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­110
  • 2.­113
  • 2.­117
  • 2.­131
  • 2.­180
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­196
  • 4.­2-3
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­33-34
  • 4.­36
  • 4.­41-43
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­60
  • 4.­62
  • 5.­12
  • 5.­16
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­7-8
  • 7.­29
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­15
  • 10.­17
  • 10.­19-20
  • 10.­23-24
  • 10.­27
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­59
  • 11.­22-23
  • 11.­26-27
  • 11.­31
  • 11.­41
  • 11.­63
  • 11.­92-93
  • 11.­96
  • 11.­99-101
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­137
  • 11.­154
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­231
  • 11.­236
  • 11.­240-241
  • 11.­247-248
  • 11.­251-252
  • 11.­255
  • 11.­270
  • 11.­272
  • 12.­12
  • 12.­17
  • 12.­50
  • 13.­16
  • 13.­18
  • 13.­40-41
  • 13.­57-58
  • 13.­65
  • 13.­67-68
  • 13.­70
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­77
  • 14.­84
  • 14.­92-93
  • 14.­99
  • 14.­119
  • 14.­136-140
  • 14.­151
  • 14.­155
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­60
  • 15.­94-95
  • 15.­97
  • 15.­114
  • 15.­116
  • 15.­119-120
  • 15.­122-124
  • 15.­129
  • 15.­134
  • 15.­137
  • 15.­150-151
  • 15.­153-154
  • 15.­182
  • 15.­211-212
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­226
  • 15.­239-240
  • 16.­16
  • 16.­20
  • 16.­26
  • 16.­30
  • 17.­5
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­5
  • 24.­9-10
  • 24.­34
  • 24.­40
  • 24.­200
  • 25.­14
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­38
  • 26.­15-16
  • 26.­33
  • 26.­37
  • 26.­50
  • 26.­56
  • 27.­4
  • 27.­20
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­52
  • 27.­71
  • 27.­78
  • 27.­80-82
  • 27.­85-86
  • 28.­47
  • 28.­52-53
  • 29.­2
  • 30.­8-9
  • 30.­19
  • 30.­40
  • 30.­42-43
  • 30.­49
  • 30.­51
  • 31.­25
  • 32.­2-6
  • 32.­8
  • 32.­10-12
  • 32.­16
  • 32.­18
  • 32.­20-21
  • 32.­25
  • 32.­27
  • 32.­29
  • 32.­32-34
  • 32.­42
  • 33.­2
  • 33.­18
  • 33.­22
  • 33.­28-29
  • 33.­44
  • 33.­50
  • 33.­84
  • 33.­113-114
  • 33.­125
  • 34.­5
  • 34.­19
  • 34.­28
  • 35.­210
  • 35.­297
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­70
  • 37.­76
  • 38.­33-34
  • 50.­3
  • 51.­50-51
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­86
  • 52.­99
  • 52.­104
  • 53.­249-250
  • 53.­382
  • 53.­384
  • 53.­418
  • 53.­518
  • 53.­526
  • 53.­811
  • 53.­821
  • 53.­845
  • 53.­848
  • 53.­850
  • 54.­80
  • n.­272
  • n.­319
  • n.­470
  • n.­565
  • n.­602
  • n.­607
  • n.­666
  • n.­868
  • n.­928
  • n.­938
  • n.­1019
  • n.­1161
  • n.­1198
  • n.­1227
  • n.­1230
  • n.­1237
  • n.­1255
  • n.­1307
  • n.­1654
  • n.­1661
  • n.­1781-1782
  • n.­1833
  • n.­1879
  • n.­1881
  • n.­1916
  • n.­2007
  • n.­2200
  • n.­3192
  • g.­888
  • g.­1508
g.­25

activity

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karman

A ritual activity (such as pacifying, nourishing, etc.). This term is also translated in other instances as “rite,” “karma,” “karman,” or “karmic accumulation.” In the latter three cases the term refers to karmic accumulation, positive or negative, that will produce results in the future, unless it is purified.

Located in 265 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­54
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­47
  • 2.­52
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­116-117
  • 2.­123
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­198
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­35
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­72
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­30
  • 8.­1
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­2
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­160
  • 11.­192
  • 11.­214
  • 11.­248-250
  • 11.­253-255
  • 11.­260
  • 13.­2-4
  • 13.­17
  • 13.­24
  • 13.­38-39
  • 13.­47-48
  • 13.­55-57
  • 13.­59
  • 13.­63
  • 13.­65-67
  • 14.­7-8
  • 14.­47
  • 14.­68-69
  • 14.­113
  • 14.­134
  • 14.­136
  • 14.­155-156
  • 14.­172
  • 14.­175
  • 14.­180
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­4
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­57
  • 15.­61
  • 15.­67
  • 15.­70
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­79
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­87-88
  • 15.­90-93
  • 15.­95-96
  • 15.­116
  • 15.­124
  • 15.­151
  • 15.­155
  • 15.­174
  • 15.­182
  • 15.­187
  • 15.­198
  • 15.­210-211
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­233
  • 15.­236-241
  • 15.­243
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­9
  • 16.­14
  • 17.­7-8
  • 24.­33-34
  • 24.­85
  • 24.­177
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­24
  • 26.­49
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­16-17
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­75-76
  • 28.­1
  • 28.­45
  • 30.­7
  • 32.­5-6
  • 32.­39
  • 33.­36
  • 33.­42
  • 33.­46
  • 33.­96-97
  • 33.­126
  • 34.­14-16
  • 34.­20-21
  • 35.­56
  • 35.­64
  • 35.­70
  • 35.­72-73
  • 35.­82
  • 35.­87
  • 35.­93
  • 35.­106
  • 35.­117
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­137
  • 35.­144
  • 35.­160
  • 35.­167
  • 35.­176
  • 35.­181-182
  • 35.­184
  • 35.­186
  • 35.­192
  • 35.­198
  • 35.­206
  • 35.­210
  • 35.­217-218
  • 35.­245
  • 35.­283
  • 35.­285
  • 36.­1
  • 36.­12-14
  • 36.­17
  • 37.­2
  • 37.­17
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­37
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­64
  • 37.­68-69
  • 37.­71-72
  • 37.­77
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­81-85
  • 37.­89-91
  • 37.­93
  • 37.­95-96
  • 37.­98-99
  • 37.­101-103
  • 37.­105
  • 37.­117
  • 37.­122
  • 38.­34
  • 51.­50-51
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­129
  • 52.­148
  • 53.­62
  • 53.­174
  • 53.­176
  • 53.­573
  • 53.­585
  • 53.­889
  • 53.­922
  • n.­297
  • n.­636
  • n.­662
  • n.­800
  • n.­937-938
  • n.­941
  • n.­960
  • n.­1008
  • n.­1028
  • n.­1034
  • n.­1075
  • n.­1147
  • n.­1155
  • n.­1160
  • n.­1166
  • n.­1173-1174
  • n.­1181
  • n.­1227
  • n.­1288
  • n.­1291
  • n.­1330
  • n.­1335
  • n.­1339
  • n.­1377
  • n.­1417
  • n.­1424
  • n.­1654
  • n.­1676
  • n.­1881
  • n.­1888
  • n.­1946
  • n.­2000
  • n.­2004
  • n.­2192
  • n.­2320
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2394
  • n.­2432
  • n.­2451
  • n.­2483
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2648
  • n.­2841
  • n.­3311
  • g.­695
  • g.­1341
g.­30

adept of vidyās

Wylie:
  • rig ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རིག་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyādhara

See “vidyādhara.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­7
  • g.­2039
g.­37

affliction

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The essentially pure nature of mind is obscured and afflicted by various psychological defilements, which destroy the mind’s peace and composure and lead to unwholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind, acting as causes for continued existence in saṃsāra. Included among them are the primary afflictions of desire (rāga), anger (dveṣa), and ignorance (avidyā). It is said that there are eighty-four thousand of these negative mental qualities, for which the eighty-four thousand categories of the Buddha’s teachings serve as the antidote.

Kleśa is also commonly translated as “negative emotions,” “disturbing emotions,” and so on. The Pāli kilesa, Middle Indic kileśa, and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kleśa all primarily mean “stain” or “defilement.” The translation “affliction” is a secondary development that derives from the more general (non-Buddhist) classical understanding of √kliś (“to harm,“ “to afflict”). Both meanings are noted by Buddhist commentators.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­58
  • 24.­221
  • 33.­120
  • 35.­67
  • 37.­5
  • 51.­74
  • 53.­197
  • 53.­332
  • 53.­674
  • 54.­29
  • n.­31
  • n.­3364
  • g.­491
  • g.­1127
g.­57

Akaniṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha

The highest heaven in the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­35
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 5.­8
  • 10.­7
  • 14.­98
  • 15.­192
  • 26.­13
  • 31.­30
  • 37.­46
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­18
  • 53.­49
  • 53.­116
  • n.­2328
  • n.­2366
  • n.­2809
g.­146

Apramāṇa

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇa

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­153

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat

“Worthy one” is an epithet applied to the original (usually sixteen) disciples of the Buddha; also a term for any being who attained nirvāṇa by following the Hīnayāna vehicle.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­37
  • 27.­3-4
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­27-28
  • 27.­42
  • 35.­41
  • 37.­38
  • 50.­49
  • 51.­54
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­7-8
  • 53.­14
  • 53.­81
  • 53.­103
  • 53.­188
  • 53.­220-221
  • n.­1619
  • n.­2799
  • n.­2805
  • g.­490
  • g.­610
  • g.­1294
g.­169

Asaṅga

Wylie:
  • thogs med
Tibetan:
  • ཐོགས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṅga

Famous Yogācāra scholar.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 53.­452
  • n.­26
g.­172

Asipattra

Wylie:
  • ral gri’i lo ma
Tibetan:
  • རལ་གྲིའི་ལོ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • asipattra

“Razor Leaves,” one of the hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­239
  • 53.­672
  • 54.­74
g.­180

asura

Wylie:
  • lha min
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

A class of divine beings ranking below gods (deva), known for their jealous and warlike disposition.

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­93
  • 4.­34
  • 10.­6-7
  • 11.­85
  • 11.­127
  • 11.­131
  • 11.­264
  • 12.­15
  • 12.­23
  • 13.­52
  • 15.­85
  • 15.­190
  • 17.­3
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­18
  • 24.­125
  • 24.­205
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­41
  • 28.­42
  • 30.­21
  • 32.­13
  • 33.­83
  • 34.­16
  • 36.­13
  • 37.­7
  • 37.­28
  • 37.­60
  • 37.­73
  • 38.­28
  • 52.­95
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­51
  • 53.­63
  • 53.­74
  • 53.­79
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­233
  • 53.­238
  • 53.­422
  • 53.­909
  • 53.­916
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­54
  • 54.­56
  • 54.­66-69
  • 54.­104
  • n.­725
  • n.­1263-1264
  • n.­1570
  • n.­1768
  • n.­1770
  • n.­2004
  • n.­2350-2351
  • n.­2370
  • n.­3338
  • n.­3348
  • g.­182
  • g.­209
  • g.­223
  • g.­368
  • g.­383
  • g.­776
  • g.­1181
  • g.­1235
  • g.­1293
  • g.­1592
  • g.­2027
g.­187

Atapas

Wylie:
  • mi gdung ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གདུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • atapas

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­157
  • 5.­8
  • 53.­1
g.­188

Aṭaṭa

Wylie:
  • so tham tham pa
Tibetan:
  • སོ་ཐམ་ཐམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aṭaṭa

One of the cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­671
  • 54.­75
g.­201

Avalokiteśvara

Wylie:
  • spyan ras gzigs dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་རས་གཟིགས་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • avalokiteśvara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the “eight close sons of the Buddha,” he is also known as the bodhisattva who embodies compassion. In certain tantras, he is also the lord of the three families, where he embodies the compassion of the buddhas. In Tibet, he attained great significance as a special protector of Tibet, and in China, in female form, as Guanyin, the most important bodhisattva in all of East Asia.

In this text:

One of the bodhisattvas attending the delivery of the MMK.

Located in 43 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­41
  • 2.­140
  • 2.­151
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­190
  • 4.­72-73
  • 4.­88-89
  • 5.­5
  • 5.­10
  • 6.­3
  • 7.­17-18
  • 7.­22-23
  • 11.­195
  • 26.­32
  • 28.­2-3
  • 28.­5
  • 28.­24
  • 29.­7
  • 32.­36
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­71
  • 37.­98
  • 50.­14
  • 50.­18-19
  • 54.­104
  • n.­467
  • n.­591
  • n.­656
  • n.­658
  • n.­906-907
  • n.­2500
  • n.­2505-2506
  • n.­2930
  • g.­868
  • g.­876
g.­202

Avava

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • avava

This seems to be one of the hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 54.­74
  • n.­3357
g.­203

Avīci

Wylie:
  • mnar med
Tibetan:
  • མནར་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • avīci

The worst of the hell realms.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­35
  • 1.­106
  • 7.­3
  • 11.­242
  • 34.­23
  • 37.­66
  • 53.­146
  • 53.­264
  • 53.­489
  • 53.­670-671
  • 53.­906
  • 54.­76-77
  • 54.­79
  • 54.­90
  • n.­630
  • n.­2957
  • n.­3360
g.­207

Avṛha

Wylie:
  • mi che ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • avṛha

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­157
  • 53.­1
g.­208

awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhi

This may be awakening in the literal sense, as from sleep, but in the Buddhist context it is the awakening from ignorance, i.e., the direct realization of truth.

Located in 137 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5-6
  • i.­9
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­118
  • 2.­112
  • 2.­130-131
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­203
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­41-42
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­13
  • 7.­27
  • 7.­29
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­12
  • 9.­19
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­57
  • 11.­137
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­199
  • 11.­257
  • 11.­260
  • 14.­6-7
  • 14.­101
  • 14.­110
  • 14.­113
  • 14.­133
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­217
  • 15.­219
  • 15.­242
  • 16.­29
  • 16.­31
  • 17.­21-22
  • 17.­25
  • 24.­24
  • 24.­28
  • 24.­30
  • 24.­32
  • 27.­3
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­43
  • 28.­49
  • 29.­2
  • 30.­44
  • 31.­23
  • 33.­103
  • 34.­8
  • 35.­305
  • 37.­2
  • 37.­66
  • 37.­70
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­104
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 50.­20
  • 50.­22
  • 52.­6
  • 53.­7-8
  • 53.­92
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­104
  • 53.­329
  • 53.­352
  • 53.­367
  • 53.­375
  • 53.­390
  • 53.­400
  • 53.­404
  • 53.­448
  • 53.­455
  • 53.­483
  • 53.­496
  • 53.­500
  • 53.­516
  • 53.­524
  • 53.­529
  • 53.­546
  • 53.­594
  • 53.­611
  • 53.­630
  • 53.­768
  • 53.­778
  • 53.­780
  • 53.­786
  • 53.­808
  • 53.­818-819
  • 53.­876
  • 53.­896
  • 53.­921
  • 53.­923
  • 54.­11
  • 54.­21
  • 54.­85
  • 54.­99
  • n.­5
  • n.­392
  • n.­471
  • n.­624
  • n.­1279
  • n.­1319-1321
  • n.­1344
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2508
  • n.­2611
  • n.­2761
  • n.­2772
  • n.­2799
  • n.­2806
  • n.­2908
  • n.­2946
  • n.­2948
  • n.­2962
  • n.­2964
  • n.­3192
  • n.­3230
  • g.­293
  • g.­610
  • g.­1251
  • g.­1763
g.­227

barbarian

Wylie:
  • kla klo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླ་ཀློ།
Sanskrit:
  • mleccha

See “mleccha.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­32
  • 24.­132
  • 24.­138
  • 24.­211
  • g.­1046
g.­293

bodhisattva

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems dpa’
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhisattva

A person/being (sattva) who has vowed to attain awakening (bodhi) in order to free all beings from cyclic existence.

Located in 499 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1
  • i.­5-6
  • 1.­1-4
  • 1.­6
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­14-15
  • 1.­19-21
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­32-35
  • 1.­37-38
  • 1.­40
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­51-52
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­66
  • 1.­68
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­74
  • 1.­76
  • 1.­80
  • 1.­84
  • 1.­93
  • 1.­106-109
  • 1.­111-120
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­20-21
  • 2.­23-24
  • 2.­31
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­36-37
  • 2.­40-41
  • 2.­70
  • 2.­72-73
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­79
  • 2.­87
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­98
  • 2.­100
  • 2.­107-109
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­141
  • 2.­146-147
  • 2.­149
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­178-179
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­186-187
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­197-199
  • 2.­202-204
  • 2.­207-209
  • 2.­211
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­3
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­9-10
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­74
  • 4.­80-81
  • 4.­83
  • 4.­115-116
  • 5.­21
  • 6.­13
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­12
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­4-5
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10-13
  • 9.­2
  • 9.­19-22
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­57-58
  • 10.­60
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­197-198
  • 11.­211
  • 11.­235
  • 11.­273
  • 12.­53
  • 13.­49
  • 13.­53
  • 13.­60
  • 13.­72
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­109
  • 14.­114
  • 14.­121
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­124
  • 15.­128
  • 15.­194
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­243
  • 17.­38
  • 24.­23-24
  • 24.­243
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­7
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­10
  • 27.­28-29
  • 27.­32
  • 27.­36-37
  • 27.­46
  • 27.­54
  • 27.­87
  • 28.­3
  • 28.­31-32
  • 28.­55
  • 29.­15
  • 29.­20
  • 30.­28
  • 30.­43
  • 30.­52
  • 31.­23
  • 31.­62
  • 32.­45
  • 33.­16
  • 33.­79
  • 33.­92-93
  • 33.­126
  • 34.­25
  • 34.­33
  • 34.­36
  • 34.­52
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­42
  • 35.­48
  • 35.­60
  • 35.­112
  • 35.­116
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­162
  • 35.­293
  • 35.­306
  • 35.­308
  • 36.­18
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­38
  • 37.­45
  • 37.­49
  • 37.­67
  • 37.­72
  • 37.­75
  • 37.­98
  • 37.­103
  • 37.­105
  • 37.­108
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­126
  • 38.­51
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­10
  • 50.­20
  • 50.­22
  • 50.­26
  • 50.­33
  • 50.­51
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­52
  • 51.­54
  • 51.­74
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­1-2
  • 52.­4
  • 52.­6-7
  • 52.­9-10
  • 52.­13
  • 52.­61
  • 52.­132
  • 52.­143-145
  • 52.­147
  • 52.­149
  • 53.­1-2
  • 53.­7
  • 53.­13
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­66
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­139
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­145
  • 53.­436
  • 53.­438
  • 53.­469
  • 53.­495
  • 53.­518
  • 53.­528
  • 53.­576
  • 53.­814
  • 53.­816
  • 53.­921
  • 53.­924
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­7-9
  • 54.­27
  • 54.­63-64
  • 54.­70-71
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­103-104
  • n.­5
  • n.­9
  • n.­26
  • n.­31
  • n.­138
  • n.­269
  • n.­271
  • n.­287
  • n.­344
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­624
  • n.­626
  • n.­681
  • n.­724-725
  • n.­732
  • n.­770
  • n.­781
  • n.­841
  • n.­908
  • n.­1013
  • n.­1330
  • n.­1530
  • n.­1643
  • n.­1692
  • n.­2007
  • n.­2089
  • n.­2252
  • n.­2326
  • n.­2432
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2500
  • n.­2508
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2541
  • n.­2598
  • n.­2608
  • n.­2748
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2825
  • n.­2999
  • n.­3134
  • n.­3229
  • n.­3320-3321
  • n.­3345-3346
  • g.­7
  • g.­34
  • g.­55
  • g.­61
  • g.­62
  • g.­72
  • g.­76
  • g.­93
  • g.­98
  • g.­101
  • g.­105
  • g.­108
  • g.­113
  • g.­117
  • g.­120
  • g.­135
  • g.­136
  • g.­145
  • g.­193
  • g.­198
  • g.­201
  • g.­206
  • g.­232
  • g.­233
  • g.­243
  • g.­272
  • g.­292
  • g.­294
  • g.­329
  • g.­333
  • g.­339
  • g.­356
  • g.­406
  • g.­460
  • g.­501
  • g.­502
  • g.­503
  • g.­505
  • g.­506
  • g.­511
  • g.­521
  • g.­525
  • g.­557
  • g.­750
  • g.­781
  • g.­782
  • g.­783
  • g.­784
  • g.­838
  • g.­846
  • g.­850
  • g.­858
  • g.­861
  • g.­868
  • g.­876
  • g.­909
  • g.­928
  • g.­930
  • g.­946
  • g.­963
  • g.­964
  • g.­992
  • g.­997
  • g.­998
  • g.­1084
  • g.­1103
  • g.­1104
  • g.­1131
  • g.­1144
  • g.­1184
  • g.­1188
  • g.­1226
  • g.­1227
  • g.­1268
  • g.­1313
  • g.­1318
  • g.­1319
  • g.­1361
  • g.­1398
  • g.­1400
  • g.­1405
  • g.­1406
  • g.­1411
  • g.­1413
  • g.­1415
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1452
  • g.­1456
  • g.­1467
  • g.­1468
  • g.­1471
  • g.­1473
  • g.­1478
  • g.­1479
  • g.­1483
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1535
  • g.­1538
  • g.­1579
  • g.­1595
  • g.­1606
  • g.­1618
  • g.­1639
  • g.­1641
  • g.­1645
  • g.­1649
  • g.­1653
  • g.­1655
  • g.­1656
  • g.­1660
  • g.­1665
  • g.­1666
  • g.­1676
  • g.­1679
  • g.­1680
  • g.­1685
  • g.­1694
  • g.­1709
  • g.­1717
  • g.­1724
  • g.­1756
  • g.­1758
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1781
  • g.­1783
  • g.­1797
  • g.­1802
  • g.­1804
  • g.­1808
  • g.­1913
  • g.­1961
  • g.­1986
  • g.­2032
  • g.­2062
  • g.­2065
  • g.­2067
  • g.­2068
  • g.­2069
  • g.­2103
  • g.­2110
  • g.­2147
g.­299

Brahmakāyika

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­301

Brahmapurohita

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • brahmapurohita

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­305

brahmin

Wylie:
  • bram ze
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa

A member of the priestly caste.

Located in 95 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­178
  • 3.­7
  • 4.­7
  • 11.­146
  • 15.­120
  • 15.­126
  • 24.­153
  • 24.­155
  • 25.­31
  • 26.­53
  • 27.­51
  • 27.­55
  • 28.­22
  • 28.­26
  • 28.­34
  • 32.­11
  • 37.­119
  • 51.­4
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­114
  • 53.­156
  • 53.­162
  • 53.­170
  • 53.­229
  • 53.­251
  • 53.­394
  • 53.­397
  • 53.­401
  • 53.­405-406
  • 53.­419
  • 53.­421
  • 53.­428
  • 53.­509
  • 53.­640
  • 53.­645-646
  • 53.­665-666
  • 53.­684
  • 53.­709
  • 53.­735
  • 53.­783
  • 53.­794
  • 53.­796
  • 53.­833
  • 53.­862
  • 53.­877-878
  • 53.­884
  • 53.­887-888
  • 53.­890
  • 53.­893
  • 53.­895-896
  • 53.­898-899
  • 54.­58
  • n.­518
  • n.­523
  • n.­1604
  • n.­1660
  • n.­2447
  • n.­2543
  • n.­2814
  • n.­2836
  • n.­2897
  • n.­2943
  • n.­3012-3013
  • n.­3054
  • n.­3105
  • n.­3116
  • n.­3123
  • n.­3141-3142
  • n.­3206
  • n.­3282
  • n.­3285
  • n.­3288
  • g.­575
  • g.­628
  • g.­880
  • g.­882
  • g.­1083
  • g.­1275
  • g.­1292
  • g.­1431
  • g.­1503
  • g.­1575
  • g.­1627
  • g.­1654
  • g.­1727
  • g.­2077
g.­309

Bṛhatphala

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhatphala

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­311

buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • buddha

A fully realized (“awakened”) being; when referring to a particular buddha or tathāgata, this term is capitalized.

Located in 612 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • i.­6
  • i.­9
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16-17
  • 1.­30-31
  • 1.­33-35
  • 1.­37-38
  • 1.­40
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­72-74
  • 1.­95
  • 1.­97
  • 1.­105-107
  • 1.­109
  • 1.­118
  • 1.­120-121
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8-9
  • 2.­16-17
  • 2.­21-22
  • 2.­24-25
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­29-31
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­38
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46
  • 2.­50-59
  • 2.­61
  • 2.­63
  • 2.­65
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­82
  • 2.­86
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­141
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­187
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­196-198
  • 2.­202-204
  • 2.­207-209
  • 3.­1-2
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­9-10
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­82-83
  • 4.­112
  • 5.­6
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­8-9
  • 7.­2
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­7
  • 8.­4
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 8.­12
  • 9.­4
  • 9.­18-19
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­14-15
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­37-38
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­61
  • 11.­66
  • 11.­69
  • 11.­71
  • 11.­73
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­88
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­153
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­170
  • 11.­188-189
  • 11.­191
  • 11.­194
  • 11.­235
  • 11.­242
  • 11.­259
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­51
  • 13.­31
  • 13.­60
  • 14.­1-3
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­10
  • 14.­29
  • 14.­103-104
  • 14.­114
  • 14.­121-122
  • 14.­124-125
  • 15.­5-6
  • 15.­104
  • 15.­109
  • 15.­111
  • 15.­194-195
  • 15.­210-211
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­218
  • 15.­220
  • 15.­225
  • 15.­229
  • 15.­231
  • 15.­233
  • 15.­235-236
  • 15.­239
  • 16.­8
  • 16.­10-11
  • 16.­14
  • 16.­19
  • 16.­24
  • 16.­27-28
  • 16.­34
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­3
  • 17.­9
  • 17.­30
  • 17.­32-33
  • 17.­37
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­5-6
  • 25.­10-15
  • 25.­17
  • 25.­21
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­36-37
  • 26.­7
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­15
  • 26.­23
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­3-4
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­8
  • 27.­12
  • 27.­15
  • 27.­19
  • 27.­21
  • 27.­23-25
  • 27.­27-30
  • 27.­34
  • 27.­40
  • 27.­42
  • 27.­44
  • 27.­47
  • 27.­54
  • 27.­64
  • 27.­70-71
  • 28.­7
  • 29.­5
  • 30.­6
  • 30.­40
  • 30.­46-48
  • 30.­51
  • 31.­23-24
  • 31.­49
  • 32.­24
  • 33.­76-77
  • 33.­79
  • 33.­81
  • 33.­102
  • 33.­117
  • 34.­2-3
  • 34.­12
  • 34.­14
  • 34.­30
  • 34.­34-35
  • 34.­38
  • 34.­45
  • 34.­50
  • 35.­1-3
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­7
  • 35.­10
  • 35.­20
  • 35.­27
  • 35.­45
  • 35.­55
  • 35.­66
  • 35.­82
  • 35.­87
  • 35.­94
  • 35.­99
  • 35.­101
  • 35.­111-112
  • 35.­115
  • 35.­117-118
  • 35.­124
  • 35.­144
  • 35.­176
  • 35.­184
  • 35.­192
  • 35.­195
  • 35.­206
  • 35.­234-235
  • 35.­239-240
  • 35.­267-268
  • 35.­282
  • 35.­286
  • 35.­288-289
  • 35.­292
  • 35.­294
  • 35.­299-300
  • 35.­302
  • 35.­306-307
  • 37.­43
  • 37.­56
  • 37.­65
  • 37.­67
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­78
  • 37.­83-84
  • 37.­91-92
  • 37.­102
  • 37.­108-109
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­123
  • 38.­2-3
  • 38.­5-6
  • 38.­9
  • 38.­12
  • 38.­18
  • 38.­26
  • 38.­46
  • 38.­49
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­12
  • 50.­18
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­51
  • 51.­72
  • 52.­1
  • 52.­3-4
  • 52.­6
  • 52.­11
  • 52.­13
  • 52.­96
  • 52.­141
  • 52.­145
  • 52.­149
  • 53.­6-7
  • 53.­11
  • 53.­39
  • 53.­41
  • 53.­56
  • 53.­62
  • 53.­71
  • 53.­73
  • 53.­75
  • 53.­80
  • 53.­88
  • 53.­94
  • 53.­102-103
  • 53.­107
  • 53.­109
  • 53.­113
  • 53.­120
  • 53.­129
  • 53.­132
  • 53.­148
  • 53.­151-153
  • 53.­155-156
  • 53.­165
  • 53.­199
  • 53.­202
  • 53.­214
  • 53.­241
  • 53.­246
  • 53.­268
  • 53.­291
  • 53.­298
  • 53.­315
  • 53.­326
  • 53.­351
  • 53.­436
  • 53.­438
  • 53.­441
  • 53.­463
  • 53.­492
  • 53.­523
  • 53.­534
  • 53.­537
  • 53.­595
  • 53.­597
  • 53.­606
  • 53.­675
  • 53.­678-679
  • 53.­717
  • 53.­900
  • 53.­913
  • 54.­8
  • 54.­23-24
  • 54.­64-65
  • 54.­67
  • 54.­70-71
  • 54.­98
  • 54.­100-102
  • 54.­104
  • n.­22
  • n.­32
  • n.­122
  • n.­271
  • n.­291
  • n.­355
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­564
  • n.­568
  • n.­603
  • n.­622
  • n.­626
  • n.­662
  • n.­685
  • n.­725
  • n.­727
  • n.­733
  • n.­770
  • n.­792
  • n.­795
  • n.­805
  • n.­821
  • n.­838
  • n.­888
  • n.­911
  • n.­966
  • n.­986
  • n.­1083
  • n.­1087
  • n.­1267
  • n.­1282
  • n.­1284
  • n.­1287
  • n.­1308
  • n.­1310
  • n.­1530
  • n.­1619
  • n.­1630
  • n.­1633-1634
  • n.­1833-1834
  • n.­1836
  • n.­1892
  • n.­1972-1973
  • n.­1994
  • n.­2023-2024
  • n.­2089
  • n.­2134
  • n.­2140
  • n.­2160
  • n.­2183
  • n.­2188
  • n.­2236
  • n.­2335
  • n.­2337
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2461
  • n.­2465
  • n.­2481
  • n.­2492
  • n.­2497
  • n.­2505
  • n.­2514
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2611-2612
  • n.­2758
  • n.­2766
  • n.­2768
  • n.­2772
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2783-2785
  • n.­2795
  • n.­2797
  • n.­2802
  • n.­2805
  • n.­2811
  • n.­2827-2828
  • n.­2867
  • n.­2894
  • n.­2905
  • n.­2914
  • n.­2919
  • n.­2921
  • n.­2933
  • n.­3026
  • n.­3060
  • n.­3064
  • n.­3119
  • n.­3189
  • n.­3248
  • n.­3294
  • n.­3308-3309
  • n.­3327
  • n.­3368
  • n.­3380
  • n.­3390
  • n.­6264
  • n.­6549
  • g.­41
  • g.­50
  • g.­153
  • g.­155
  • g.­185
  • g.­225
  • g.­250
  • g.­288
  • g.­298
  • g.­312
  • g.­315
  • g.­326
  • g.­334
  • g.­350
  • g.­377
  • g.­378
  • g.­424
  • g.­433
  • g.­597
  • g.­682
  • g.­704
  • g.­705
  • g.­712
  • g.­828
  • g.­830
  • g.­885
  • g.­926
  • g.­941
  • g.­985
  • g.­996
  • g.­1013
  • g.­1060
  • g.­1072
  • g.­1163
  • g.­1229
  • g.­1236
  • g.­1246
  • g.­1251
  • g.­1296
  • g.­1348
  • g.­1365
  • g.­1386
  • g.­1388
  • g.­1443
  • g.­1453
  • g.­1514
  • g.­1543
  • g.­1548
  • g.­1574
  • g.­1591
  • g.­1603
  • g.­1605
  • g.­1616
  • g.­1642
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1763
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1781
  • g.­1782
  • g.­1818
  • g.­1819
  • g.­1889
  • g.­1895
  • g.­1911
  • g.­1912
  • g.­1915
  • g.­1928
  • g.­1999
  • g.­2001
  • g.­2044
  • g.­2049
  • g.­2118
  • g.­2151
g.­319

cakravartin

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’ rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

Apart from the standard meaning of a universal emperor or wheel-turning monarch, this term, often along with “tathāgata,” is used as an epithet describing a class of mantra deities also referred to as “uṣṇīṣa kings.”

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8-10
  • 2.­145
  • 9.­18
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­55
  • 14.­2-5
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­2
  • 25.­8
  • 25.­13-14
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­60-61
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­42
  • 27.­44
  • 27.­56
  • 37.­17
  • 37.­31
  • 37.­53
  • 37.­68-69
  • 50.­16
  • 53.­357
  • 53.­359
  • 53.­766-767
  • n.­423
  • n.­1075
  • n.­1580
  • n.­1804
  • n.­1836
  • n.­2211
  • n.­2504
  • n.­2919
  • n.­3189-3190
  • n.­3192
  • g.­1835
  • g.­2125
g.­320

Cakravartin

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

One of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­151
  • 14.­71
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­50
  • 27.­43
  • 30.­2
  • 30.­49
  • 35.­39
  • 35.­273
  • 37.­14-15
  • 38.­17
  • 50.­13
  • 53.­357
  • n.­2212
  • n.­2283-2284
  • n.­2446
  • n.­2463
  • n.­2498
g.­356

Cloud of Dharma

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • dharmamegha

The tenth level of the bodhisattva’s realization.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 4.­2
  • 8.­5
  • 10.­58
  • 14.­1
  • 15.­2
  • n.­768
g.­358

consecration

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiṣeka

See “empowerment.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 35.­34
  • n.­3331
  • g.­487
g.­381

destiny

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • gati

Any of the five or six types of rebirth.

Located in 37 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­24
  • 5.­14
  • 11.­78
  • 11.­86
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­111
  • 14.­133
  • 15.­191
  • 15.­195
  • 16.­5
  • 16.­30
  • 24.­35
  • 29.­2-3
  • 30.­48
  • 31.­22
  • 32.­9
  • 32.­24
  • 35.­65
  • 35.­298
  • 35.­305
  • 37.­74
  • 38.­37
  • 51.­78
  • 53.­10
  • 53.­235
  • 53.­288
  • 53.­358
  • 53.­410
  • 53.­765
  • n.­816
  • n.­1265
  • n.­1835
  • n.­1884-1885
  • n.­2777
  • n.­3323
g.­404

dharmadhātu

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbying
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབྱིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhātu

See “sphere of phenomena.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • 54.­99
  • n.­1500
  • n.­3380-3381
  • g.­1540
g.­443

divine youth

Wylie:
  • gzhon nu
Tibetan:
  • གཞོན་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāra

See “kumāra.”

Located in 223 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­6-7
  • 1.­9-12
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16
  • 1.­18-19
  • 1.­21-22
  • 1.­32
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­67
  • 1.­69
  • 1.­72-73
  • 1.­106-109
  • 1.­118
  • 1.­121
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­1-4
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8-9
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­49
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­104
  • 2.­106-111
  • 2.­117
  • 2.­119
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­147
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­184
  • 2.­194
  • 2.­208
  • 2.­211
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­68-69
  • 4.­93
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­4
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­12
  • 8.­1-2
  • 9.­1-2
  • 11.­1-3
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­191
  • 12.­1-3
  • 12.­52
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­52
  • 15.­5
  • 15.­105
  • 15.­108
  • 15.­225
  • 15.­233
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­20
  • 16.­33-34
  • 24.­40
  • 25.­2
  • 26.­1
  • 27.­1-2
  • 27.­29
  • 27.­31
  • 27.­38
  • 27.­44
  • 28.­1-2
  • 28.­5
  • 28.­8
  • 28.­11-12
  • 28.­24
  • 28.­27-29
  • 28.­33
  • 29.­1
  • 29.­3
  • 29.­6
  • 29.­11
  • 30.­1
  • 30.­48
  • 31.­1-3
  • 31.­60
  • 32.­1
  • 32.­4
  • 33.­1
  • 33.­82
  • 34.­1-2
  • 34.­31
  • 34.­33
  • 34.­44
  • 34.­47
  • 35.­2-3
  • 35.­5-6
  • 35.­298-299
  • 35.­302
  • 36.­1
  • 37.­1-2
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­107-108
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­115
  • 37.­124
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­5
  • 38.­10
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­37
  • 53.­138
  • 53.­141
  • 53.­144
  • 53.­149
  • 53.­154
  • 53.­300
  • 53.­321
  • 53.­329
  • 53.­377
  • 53.­416-417
  • 53.­511
  • 53.­517
  • 53.­560
  • 53.­811
  • 53.­856
  • 53.­880
  • 53.­883
  • 53.­921
  • 54.­1
  • 54.­3
  • 54.­7
  • 54.­43
  • 54.­48
  • 54.­59
  • 54.­62
  • 54.­65-66
  • 54.­68
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­99-100
  • 54.­104
  • n.­5
  • n.­99
  • n.­287
  • n.­292
  • n.­357
  • n.­457
  • n.­595
  • n.­781
  • n.­1028
  • n.­1309
  • n.­1702
  • n.­1707
  • n.­1776
  • n.­1875
  • n.­1879
  • n.­2020-2021
  • n.­2023
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2820
  • n.­3014
  • n.­3260
  • n.­3277
  • n.­3332
  • n.­3334
  • n.­3381
  • g.­791
g.­485

element

Wylie:
  • khams
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhātu

There are eighteen such psycho-physical elements‍—the twelve sense fields plus the six types of sensory perception.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­8
  • 33.­89
  • 54.­6
  • n.­2847
  • n.­3318
g.­486

emblem

Wylie:
  • phyag rgya
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་རྒྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • mudrā

See “mudrā.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 2.­144
  • 2.­159
  • 2.­172
  • 4.­87
  • g.­1052
g.­487

empowerment

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiṣeka

Literally “sprinkling,” abhiṣeka is a ritual consecration that often functions as a deity empowerment. The term is also translated in this text as “initiation.”

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­196-197
  • 2.­199-204
  • 2.­206
  • 11.­4
  • 11.­6
  • 11.­23
  • 25.­2
  • 37.­21
  • n.­492
  • n.­1488
  • g.­358
  • g.­607
g.­488

eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A cosmic period of time, sometimes equivalent to the time when a world system appears, exists, and disappears. According to the traditional Abhidharma understanding of cyclical time, a great eon (mahākalpa) is divided into eighty lesser eons. In the course of one great eon, the universe takes form and later disappears. During the first twenty of the lesser eons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion; during the next twenty it remains; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction; and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of empty stasis. A fortunate, or good, eon (bhadrakalpa) refers to any eon in which more than one buddha appears.

Located in 98 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­31
  • 1.­44
  • 2.­18
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­111
  • 5.­20
  • 6.­7
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­53
  • 11.­239
  • 11.­241
  • 12.­23
  • 14.­100
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­33
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­18
  • 24.­24
  • 24.­39
  • 24.­120
  • 24.­207
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­37
  • 26.­18
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­52
  • 27.­3
  • 27.­20
  • 27.­22
  • 28.­41-42
  • 28.­46
  • 28.­53
  • 29.­2
  • 32.­33
  • 32.­35
  • 33.­79
  • 34.­37-38
  • 34.­44-45
  • 34.­49
  • 37.­30
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­125
  • 50.­3
  • 52.­95
  • 53.­58-59
  • 53.­96
  • 53.­152
  • 53.­217-219
  • 53.­221
  • 53.­226
  • 53.­255
  • 53.­309
  • 53.­317
  • 53.­366
  • 53.­376
  • 53.­380
  • 53.­424
  • 53.­447
  • 53.­484
  • 53.­492
  • 53.­520
  • 53.­564
  • 53.­587
  • 53.­769
  • 53.­779
  • 53.­823
  • 53.­834-836
  • 53.­854
  • 53.­857
  • 53.­866
  • 54.­31
  • 54.­85
  • n.­603
  • n.­621
  • n.­753
  • n.­1240
  • n.­1432
  • n.­1977
  • n.­2020
  • n.­2710
  • n.­2870
  • n.­2928
  • n.­2934
  • n.­3207
  • g.­374
  • g.­475
  • g.­491
  • g.­540
  • g.­608
  • g.­877
g.­491

five degenerations

Wylie:
  • snyigs ma lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྙིགས་མ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcakaṣāya

Five signs that the later era of an eon has arrived: degenerate views, afflictions, beings, lifespan, and time.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­31
  • 7.­9
  • 54.­98
g.­497

four great kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturmahārāja

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Four gods who live on the lower slopes (fourth level) of Mount Meru in the eponymous Heaven of the Four Great Kings (Cāturmahā­rājika, rgyal chen bzhi’i ris) and guard the four cardinal directions. Each is the leader of a nonhuman class of beings living in his realm. They are Dhṛtarāṣṭra, ruling the gandharvas in the east; Virūḍhaka, ruling over the kumbhāṇḍas in the south; Virūpākṣa, ruling the nāgas in the west; and Vaiśravaṇa (also known as Kubera) ruling the yakṣas in the north. Also referred to as Guardians of the World or World Protectors (lokapāla, ’jig rten skyong ba).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­158
  • 2.­172
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­50
  • 53.­901
  • n.­3258
  • g.­414
  • g.­786
  • g.­2089
  • g.­2092
g.­515

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­171
  • 2.­209
  • 11.­127
  • 12.­15
  • 15.­86
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­30
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­9
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­53
  • 37.­39-40
  • 37.­73
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­233
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­104
  • n.­1372
  • n.­1873
  • n.­2323
  • n.­2370
  • n.­2859
  • n.­3312
  • g.­414
  • g.­497
  • g.­517
  • g.­1160
g.­518

Gaṅgā

Wylie:
  • sI ta
  • gang gA
Tibetan:
  • སཱི་ཏ།
  • གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­35
  • 4.­112
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­3
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­41
  • 10.­52
  • 14.­1
  • 24.­143
  • 24.­230
  • 24.­232
  • 27.­3
  • 31.­53-54
  • 33.­77
  • 52.­107
  • 53.­19
  • 53.­620
  • 53.­627
  • 53.­650
  • 53.­681
  • 53.­696
  • 53.­699
  • 53.­712-713
  • 53.­813
  • 53.­837
  • 54.­22
  • n.­718
  • n.­729
  • n.­731
  • n.­743
  • n.­1873
  • g.­240
  • g.­950
g.­522

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­86
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­98-100
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­164
  • 2.­209
  • 14.­76
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­13
  • 31.­33
  • 32.­38
  • 52.­123
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­907
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­104
  • n.­351
  • g.­49
  • g.­247
  • g.­411
  • g.­523
  • g.­922
  • g.­1002
  • g.­1154
  • g.­1167
  • g.­1168
  • g.­1175
  • g.­1382
  • g.­1626
  • g.­1686
  • g.­1725
  • g.­1749
  • g.­1908
  • g.­1909
g.­527

Gautama

Wylie:
  • gau ta ma
Tibetan:
  • གཽ་ཏ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gautama

One of the sages (ṛṣi).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83
  • 31.­3
  • 53.­180
  • g.­1386
g.­548

graha

Wylie:
  • gdon
  • gza’
Tibetan:
  • གདོན།
  • གཟའ།
Sanskrit:
  • graha

A class of nonhuman beings able to enter and possess the human body; a class of beings, such as Rāhu, that cause solar and lunar eclipses; a planet (this category includes the sun and the moon but excludes the earth); a planet or planetary influence personified.

Located in 108 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­93
  • 1.­95
  • 2.­82-83
  • 2.­164
  • 9.­13
  • 11.­128
  • 14.­166
  • 24.­1
  • 24.­3
  • 24.­35
  • 24.­222
  • 24.­224
  • 25.­7
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­31
  • 26.­40
  • 30.­18
  • 31.­45
  • 31.­55
  • 32.­38
  • 33.­99
  • 35.­81
  • 35.­102
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­143
  • 35.­171
  • 35.­201
  • 36.­11
  • 36.­13
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­122
  • 50.­6
  • 51.­52
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­830
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­39
  • n.­435
  • n.­1231
  • n.­1362
  • n.­1479
  • n.­2086
  • n.­2250
  • n.­2490-2491
  • n.­2620
  • n.­2860
  • n.­2935
  • n.­3152
  • n.­3156
  • g.­11
  • g.­13
  • g.­144
  • g.­164
  • g.­219
  • g.­417
  • g.­420
  • g.­423
  • g.­425
  • g.­469
  • g.­534
  • g.­587
  • g.­588
  • g.­736
  • g.­761
  • g.­774
  • g.­792
  • g.­852
  • g.­878
  • g.­961
  • g.­1019
  • g.­1022
  • g.­1024
  • g.­1099
  • g.­1100
  • g.­1101
  • g.­1102
  • g.­1126
  • g.­1208
  • g.­1214
  • g.­1232
  • g.­1329
  • g.­1342
  • g.­1350
  • g.­1437
  • g.­1446
  • g.­1529
  • g.­1532
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1757
  • g.­1762
  • g.­1803
  • g.­1850
  • g.­1878
  • g.­1882
  • g.­1924
  • g.­2047
  • g.­2082
  • g.­2090
  • g.­2116
  • g.­2149
  • g.­2158
g.­554

great eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākalpa

Definitions regarding the duration of one “great eon” vary, but are normally given in billions of (human) years. One great eon is divided into eighty intermediate eons, or, according to a different system, into four. Both systems of division are reconciled by grouping the eighty intermediate eons into four units of twenty.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­11
  • 9.­18
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­55
  • 11.­243
  • 14.­103
  • 26.­8
  • 26.­10
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­31
  • 26.­33
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­54
  • 29.­11-12
  • 53.­489
  • 53.­671
  • 54.­90
  • n.­753
  • n.­3371
  • g.­608
g.­557

Great Vehicle

Wylie:
  • theg pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāyāna

One of the major three Buddhist schools, Hīnayāna (Small Vehicle), Mahāyāna (Great Vehicle), and Vajrayāna (Diamond Vehicle). The Great Vehicle is characterized by its emphasis on compassion and altruistic principles of the bodhisattva path.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­116-117
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­178
  • 2.­196
  • 53.­104
  • n.­3321
g.­563

guhyaka

Wylie:
  • gsang ba pa
Tibetan:
  • གསང་བ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • guhyaka

A subclass of yakṣas, but much of the time used as an alternative name for yakṣas.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­110-111
  • 2.­118-119
  • 2.­188
  • 50.­8
  • 51.­1
  • 52.­14
  • 52.­80
  • 53.­347
  • n.­2696
  • g.­566
g.­572

Gūthamṛttikā

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • gūthamṛttikā

“Swamp of Feces,” one of the hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 54.­73
  • n.­3355
g.­573

Hahava

Wylie:
  • kyi hud zer ba so
Tibetan:
  • ཀྱི་ཧུད་ཟེར་བ་སོ།
Sanskrit:
  • hahava

One of the hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­671
  • 54.­74
g.­598

homa

Wylie:
  • sbyin sreg
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱིན་སྲེག
Sanskrit:
  • homa

A fire sacrifice where the practitioner offers an oblation a specified number of times; when this term refers to an individual oblation, it has been translated as “oblation.”

Located in 85 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­117
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­29
  • 10.­50
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­159
  • 11.­273
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­12
  • 13.­15-16
  • 13.­29
  • 13.­44-45
  • 13.­50
  • 13.­53
  • 13.­55
  • 13.­58-59
  • 13.­68
  • 14.­66
  • 14.­70
  • 14.­94
  • 14.­97
  • 14.­108
  • 14.­171
  • 14.­176
  • 14.­178-180
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­4
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­227
  • 24.­186
  • 24.­200
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­30-31
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­24-25
  • 26.­28
  • 27.­48
  • 27.­50
  • 27.­52
  • 27.­55-56
  • 27.­82
  • 27.­85
  • 28.­9
  • 28.­12
  • 28.­17
  • 28.­21
  • 28.­34
  • 34.­28
  • 35.­70
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­173
  • 35.­261
  • 36.­16
  • 37.­22
  • 37.­25
  • 51.­33
  • 51.­61-62
  • 51.­66
  • 54.­98
  • n.­996
  • n.­1014
  • n.­1128
  • n.­1489
  • n.­1570
  • n.­1572
  • n.­1682
  • n.­2562
  • n.­2629
  • g.­1134
g.­602

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

The god Indra; Indra is often referred to by the epithet Śakra; when used in the plural it refers to a class of gods; The name of an ancient Buddhist king; one of the Buddhist mleccha kings.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­10
  • 26.­60
  • 30.­25
  • 33.­34
  • 53.­551
  • 53.­580
  • 53.­707
  • 54.­54
  • 54.­62
  • n.­1940
  • n.­2786
  • n.­3335
  • n.­3337-3338
  • n.­3341-3342
  • n.­3344
  • n.­5224
  • g.­717
  • g.­887
  • g.­1273
  • g.­1380
  • g.­1424
  • g.­1596
  • g.­2011
  • g.­2130
g.­607

initiation

Wylie:
  • dbang
Tibetan:
  • དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiṣeka

See “empowerment.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­20
  • 14.­36
  • 35.­34
  • g.­487
g.­608

intermediate eon

Wylie:
  • bar gyi bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བར་གྱི་བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • antarakalpa

When used to describe a measure of time, the term refers to period defined in relation to the “great eon”: eighty intermediate eons make one great eon.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­2
  • 14.­131
  • 26.­14
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­33
  • n.­753
  • g.­554
g.­623

Jangchub O

Wylie:
  • byang chub ’od
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • (not in the skt. source of the mmk)

The nephew of Lha Lama Yeshe O, a king of the Yarlung imperial Tibetan line who ruled in the Western Tibetan kingdom of Gugé. Jangchub O is famously remembered for inviting the Indian teacher Atiśa to come to Tibet on his uncle’s orders. He was likely born in the early 11th century.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­1
g.­662

Kālasūtra

Wylie:
  • thig nag
Tibetan:
  • ཐིག་ནག
Sanskrit:
  • kālasūtra

“Black Thread,” one of the hot hells.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­238
  • 11.­243
  • 53.­671
  • 54.­73
g.­695

karma

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karman

Karmic accumulation, positive or negative, that will produce results in the future, unless it is purified. This term is also translated in other instances as “activity” or “rite.” In these latter cases the term refers to a ritual activity (such as pacifying, nourishing, etc.) or a rite meant to accomplish such activity.

Located in 118 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­106
  • 5.­13
  • 6.­7-8
  • 7.­7
  • 11.­78
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­248-249
  • 11.­270-271
  • 15.­87-88
  • 15.­180
  • 17.­3-5
  • 17.­10
  • 17.­12-16
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­20
  • 17.­38
  • 24.­15
  • 24.­17
  • 24.­34
  • 24.­38
  • 24.­46
  • 24.­235
  • 27.­72-79
  • 27.­83-84
  • 27.­86
  • 28.­17
  • 28.­51
  • 29.­19
  • 31.­2
  • 33.­47
  • 33.­95
  • 53.­283
  • 53.­287-289
  • 53.­354
  • 53.­389
  • 53.­402-403
  • 53.­408
  • 53.­413
  • 53.­423
  • 53.­426
  • 53.­435
  • 53.­447
  • 53.­496
  • 53.­536
  • 53.­630
  • 53.­639
  • 53.­664
  • 53.­670
  • 53.­705
  • 53.­707
  • 53.­740
  • 53.­743
  • 53.­747
  • 53.­749
  • 53.­762
  • n.­621
  • n.­817
  • n.­937
  • n.­954
  • n.­1175-1179
  • n.­1233
  • n.­1253
  • n.­1335-1337
  • n.­1343
  • n.­1381
  • n.­1384
  • n.­1424
  • n.­1485
  • n.­1676
  • n.­1679
  • n.­1880
  • n.­1888
  • n.­1986
  • n.­3130
  • n.­3159
  • n.­3170
  • n.­3175
  • n.­3354
  • n.­4756
  • n.­4993
  • n.­5150
  • n.­5178
  • n.­5389
  • n.­5809
  • n.­6777
  • g.­25
  • g.­700
  • g.­762
  • g.­1341
g.­706

Kārttikeya

Wylie:
  • smin drug bu
Tibetan:
  • སྨིན་དྲུག་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kārttikeya

Son of Śiva and a Hindu god of war.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­72
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­82
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­168
  • 30.­15
  • 37.­74
  • 53.­575-577
  • n.­337
  • n.­440
  • n.­1737
  • n.­3332
  • g.­1529
g.­712

Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśyapa

One of the tathāgatas attending the delivery of the MMK; one of the eight tathāgatas; one of the previous buddhas; one of the śrāvakas attending the delivery of the MMK; also a short name of Mahākāśyapa.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­39
  • 1.­62
  • 5.­6
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­143
  • 11.­149-153
  • 11.­160
  • 37.­110
  • 53.­127-128
  • 53.­131-132
  • 53.­251
  • 54.­55
  • 54.­58
  • 54.­62-63
  • n.­1651
  • n.­2813
  • n.­3335
  • n.­3345
  • n.­3645
g.­713

kaṭapūtana

Wylie:
  • lus srul po
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་སྲུལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaṭapūṭana

A class of demons.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 35.­143
  • 54.­47
g.­717

Kauśika

Wylie:
  • kau shi ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་ཤི་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kauśika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

“One who belongs to the Kuśika lineage.” An epithet of the god Śakra, also known as Indra, the king of the gods in the Trāyastriṃśa heaven. In the Ṛgveda, Indra is addressed by the epithet Kauśika, with the implication that he is associated with the descendants of the Kuśika lineage (gotra) as their aiding deity. In later epic and Purāṇic texts, we find the story that Indra took birth as Gādhi Kauśika, the son of Kuśika and one of the Vedic poet-seers, after the Puru king Kuśika had performed austerities for one thousand years to obtain a son equal to Indra who could not be killed by others. In the Pāli Kusajātaka (Jāt V 141–45), the Buddha, in one of his former bodhisattva lives as a Trāyastriṃśa god, takes birth as the future king Kusa upon the request of Indra, who wishes to help the childless king of the Mallas, Okkaka, and his chief queen Sīlavatī. This story is also referred to by Nāgasena in the Milindapañha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 54.­58
  • n.­3342
g.­747

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara

A class of semidivine beings, half human and half horse, or half human and half bird.

Located in 41 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­88
  • 1.­90
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­171
  • 2.­209
  • 11.­127
  • 12.­15
  • 14.­76
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44
  • 31.­34
  • 53.­124
  • 53.­233
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­908
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­104
  • g.­100
  • g.­163
  • g.­354
  • g.­450
  • g.­531
  • g.­707
  • g.­748
  • g.­825
  • g.­836
  • g.­920
  • g.­953
  • g.­955
  • g.­960
  • g.­1004
  • g.­1614
  • g.­1719
  • g.­1836
  • g.­1839
  • g.­1846
  • g.­1884
  • g.­2094
g.­752

knowledge holder

Wylie:
  • rig ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རིག་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyādhara

See “vidyādhara.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­12
  • 4.­30
  • 25.­2
  • g.­2039
g.­760

kravyāda

Wylie:
  • sha rjen
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་རྗེན།
Sanskrit:
  • kravyāda

“Carrion eater,” a class of flesh-eating spirits.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­166
  • 15.­186
  • 35.­117
  • 35.­143
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­122
  • 51.­41
  • 51.­71
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­48
  • n.­1259
g.­762

kriyā

Wylie:
  • mdzad pa
Tibetan:
  • མཛད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kriyā

A mere ritual performance (in contradistinction to karman, which is the same performance aiming at a particular outcome). The term is also used to denote a class of tantras, the Kriyā tantras.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1-2
  • i.­5
  • i.­8
  • 11.­249
  • n.­937
  • n.­2435
  • g.­1764
g.­765

krodharāja

Wylie:
  • khro rgyal
  • khro rgyal chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ།
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodharāja

“Lord of wrath.” In the MMK this term seems to refer in some cases to a whole class of divine beings, which can perhaps be regarded as the wrathful vidyārājas. “Lord of Wrath” elsewhere is an epithet of Yamāntaka.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­52
  • 35.­161
  • n.­88-89
  • n.­98
  • n.­3925
  • g.­763
  • g.­874
g.­772

Kṣāranadī

Wylie:
  • chu bo rab med
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བོ་རབ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣāranadī

“Caustic River,” one of the hells.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 54.­74
g.­773

kṣatriya

Wylie:
  • rgyal rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣatriya

A member of the warrior and administrative caste.

Located in 38 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­178-179
  • 2.­193
  • 4.­7
  • 15.­126
  • 24.­155
  • 27.­55
  • 28.­22
  • 28.­26
  • 28.­34
  • 53.­323
  • 53.­326
  • 53.­328
  • 53.­658
  • 53.­688
  • 53.­693
  • 53.­698
  • 53.­712-713
  • 53.­752
  • 53.­756
  • 53.­759
  • 53.­763
  • 53.­774
  • 53.­779
  • 53.­789
  • 53.­802
  • 54.­50
  • n.­1205
  • n.­2897
  • n.­3126
  • n.­3157
  • n.­3159
  • n.­3182-3183
  • n.­3206
  • n.­3222
  • n.­3331
g.­785

Kṣuradhārā

Wylie:
  • spu gri so
Tibetan:
  • སྤུ་གྲི་སོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣuradhārā

“Razor Blade,” one of the hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 54.­73
  • n.­3356
g.­786

Kubera

Wylie:
  • lus ngan po
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་ངན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kubera

The god of wealth and the king of the yakṣas; one of the four great kings of the directions.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 6.­10
  • 15.­160
  • 26.­28
  • 37.­74
  • n.­1824
  • n.­1895
  • n.­2467
  • n.­2658
  • n.­2726
  • n.­2980
  • n.­3295
  • g.­69
  • g.­391
  • g.­990
  • g.­1919
  • g.­2128
g.­787

Kukūla

Wylie:
  • mas ma me mur
Tibetan:
  • མས་མ་མེ་མུར།
Sanskrit:
  • kukūla

One of the hells.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • n.­3355
g.­791

kumāra

Wylie:
  • gzhon nu
Tibetan:
  • གཞོན་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāra

Apart from the usual meaning and usages (such as being a title of Mañjuśrī, etc.), this also seems to be the name of a class of nonhuman beings. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “divine youth.”

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­381
  • n.­292-293
  • n.­338
  • n.­2935
  • n.­3261
  • n.­3332
  • n.­3772
  • g.­443
  • g.­795
g.­793

Kumārakalaśa

Wylie:
  • ku mA ra ka la sha
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་མཱ་ར་ཀ་ལ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumārakalaśa

The name of an Indian preceptor and teacher who lived during the early Sarma (gsar ma) period (c. 11th century) and worked on the Tibetan translation of the Mañjuśrī­mūla­tantra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­799

Kuṇapa

Wylie:
  • ro myogs
Tibetan:
  • རོ་མྱོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṇapa

“Rotting Corpse,” one of the cold hells.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 54.­74
g.­805

kuśa grass

Wylie:
  • ku sha
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśa

Poa cynosuroides, a species of grass commonly used in religious ceremonies.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­126
  • 2.­137
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­182
  • 2.­199-200
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­64
  • 7.­11
  • 8.­8
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­52
  • 11.­58
  • 11.­156
  • 11.­158
  • 12.­49
  • 13.­15
  • 13.­22
  • 15.­6
  • 25.­26
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­47
  • 28.­7
  • 28.­28
  • 52.­72
  • 52.­87
  • n.­380-381
  • n.­1506
g.­808

kuṣmāṇḍa

Wylie:
  • grul bum
Tibetan:
  • གྲུལ་བུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṣmāṇḍa

A class of demons.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 31.­47
  • 35.­201
  • 37.­63
  • 53.­98
  • 54.­48
g.­874

lord of wrath

Wylie:
  • khro rgyal
  • khro rgyal chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ།
  • ཁྲོ་རྒྱལ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodharāja

See “krodharāja.”

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­125
  • 4.­86
  • 50.­2-3
  • 52.­41
  • 52.­148
  • n.­2535
  • g.­765
g.­875

Lord of Wrath

Wylie:
  • khro bo’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་བོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodharāja

Epithet of Yamāntaka; also the namesake mantra.

Located in 70 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­73
  • 1.­80
  • 1.­109-110
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­6-8
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­122
  • 2.­125
  • 2.­138-139
  • 2.­148-149
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­94
  • 5.­9
  • 6.­4
  • 15.­105-107
  • 15.­109
  • 35.­81
  • 50.­35-36
  • 50.­38
  • 50.­41
  • 50.­48
  • 50.­50
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­34
  • 51.­51
  • 51.­56
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­8
  • 52.­14-15
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­23
  • 52.­42
  • 52.­115-116
  • 52.­124-125
  • 52.­128-129
  • 52.­135
  • 52.­138
  • 52.­148-149
  • 53.­885
  • n.­278
  • n.­377
  • n.­1189
  • n.­2502
  • n.­2509
  • n.­2520
  • n.­2524
  • n.­2538
  • n.­2610
  • n.­2630
  • n.­2729-2730
  • n.­2738
  • n.­2741
  • n.­2842
  • g.­765
g.­877

lowest eon

Wylie:
  • dus kyi tha mar
Tibetan:
  • དུས་ཀྱི་ཐ་མར།
Sanskrit:
  • yugādhama

The least auspicious in the cycle of four eons.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­11
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­12
  • 24.­40
  • 24.­43
  • 25.­5
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­2
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­28
  • 27.­30
  • 28.­1
  • 32.­25
  • 32.­41
  • 34.­40
  • 53.­230
  • 53.­574
  • 53.­585
g.­887

Maghavan

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • maghavan
  • maghavān

“God of Bounty,” an epithet of Indra.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 54.­57
  • 54.­62
  • n.­3340-3341
  • n.­3344
g.­893

Mahābrahmā

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahmā

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 38.­21
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­1
g.­901

Mahākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāśyapa

One of the eight great śrāvakas.

Located in 37 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 2.­143
  • 4.­81
  • 11.­196
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­88
  • 53.­112
  • 53.­114
  • 53.­136
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­156-158
  • 53.­160
  • 53.­164
  • 53.­169
  • 53.­177-178
  • 53.­181
  • 53.­195
  • 53.­201
  • 53.­203-204
  • 53.­211-212
  • 53.­241
  • 53.­245
  • 53.­256
  • 53.­263
  • 53.­266
  • 53.­297
  • n.­2831
  • n.­2844
  • n.­2854
  • n.­2862-2863
  • g.­712
g.­908

Mahāmārī

Wylie:
  • ’ching chen po
Tibetan:
  • འཆིང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāmārī

A goddess of pestilence; pestilence personified.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 54.­4
  • n.­3312
g.­928

Mahā­sthāma­prāpta

Wylie:
  • mthu chen po thob pa
Tibetan:
  • མཐུ་ཆེན་པོ་ཐོབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­sthāma­prāpta

A bodhisattva.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 27.­28-29
  • 27.­36
  • 52.­132
  • n.­1633
  • n.­2373
  • n.­2428
  • g.­930
g.­930

Mahā­sthāna­prāpta

Wylie:
  • mthu chen po thob pa
Tibetan:
  • མཐུ་ཆེན་པོ་ཐོབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­sthāna­prāpta

One of the bodhisattvas, possibly the same as Mahā­sthāma­prāpta.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 37.­75
  • 37.­104
  • 54.­104
  • n.­2373
  • n.­2428
  • n.­3394
g.­946

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara

An epithet of Śiva; sometimes refers specifically to one of the forms of Śiva or to Rudra; also the name of one of the bodhisattvas attending the delivery of the MMK.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­41
  • 2.­74
  • 2.­92
  • 24.­22
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­25
  • 26.­32
  • 33.­99
  • 35.­139
  • 37.­59
  • 37.­73
  • 38.­21
  • 51.­42
  • 52.­15
  • 52.­17-18
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­123
  • 53.­462
  • n.­1544
  • n.­2617
  • n.­2739
  • n.­2984
  • g.­279
  • g.­1527
g.­958

mahoraga

Wylie:
  • brang ’gro chen po
Tibetan:
  • བྲང་འགྲོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahoraga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally “great serpents,” mahoragas are supernatural beings depicted as large, subterranean beings with human torsos and heads and the lower bodies of serpents. Their movements are said to cause earthquakes, and they make up a class of subterranean geomantic spirits whose movement through the seasons and months of the year is deemed significant for construction projects.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­84
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­209
  • 6.­11
  • 10.­6
  • 14.­76
  • 25.­13
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­33
  • 37.­74
  • 53.­207
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­104
  • g.­261
  • g.­262
  • g.­439
  • g.­1014
  • g.­1015
  • g.­1020
  • g.­1611
g.­964

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya

One of the sixteen great bodhisattvas. The content of the list varies from text to text.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­141
  • 4.­70
  • 5.­5
  • 11.­195
  • 26.­13
  • 28.­5
  • 28.­42
  • 37.­105
  • 52.­96
  • 53.­545-546
  • 54.­104
  • n.­1770
g.­984

maṇḍala

Wylie:
  • dkyil ’khor
Tibetan:
  • དཀྱིལ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇḍala

Literally a “disk” or “circle,” in the ritual context maṇḍala is a sacred space on the ground or a raised platform, arranged according to a pattern that varies from rite to rite.

Located in 220 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­109
  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­5
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­107-109
  • 2.­112-113
  • 2.­117-119
  • 2.­121
  • 2.­123-127
  • 2.­129
  • 2.­131-134
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­148
  • 2.­150
  • 2.­153-154
  • 2.­159
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­165-169
  • 2.­172-179
  • 2.­181
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­191-194
  • 2.­196-200
  • 2.­202-203
  • 2.­206-207
  • 2.­209-211
  • 3.­1-4
  • 3.­6-8
  • 3.­10-11
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­40
  • 4.­76
  • 9.­1
  • 11.­4-9
  • 11.­22
  • 11.­107-111
  • 11.­154
  • 11.­202
  • 12.­40
  • 14.­7-8
  • 14.­34
  • 14.­36-37
  • 14.­41-42
  • 14.­44
  • 14.­62-63
  • 14.­72
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­224
  • 24.­182-183
  • 24.­185
  • 25.­2
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­40
  • 33.­118
  • 34.­2
  • 35.­130
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­269
  • 36.­16
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­29
  • 37.­58
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­8
  • 38.­14
  • 38.­16-19
  • 38.­24-26
  • 38.­30-32
  • 38.­35
  • 38.­37-38
  • 38.­41
  • 38.­51
  • 52.­44
  • 52.­71
  • 52.­146
  • n.­9
  • n.­319
  • n.­357
  • n.­362
  • n.­370
  • n.­376
  • n.­378
  • n.­380
  • n.­391
  • n.­401
  • n.­420
  • n.­430
  • n.­436-437
  • n.­445-449
  • n.­453
  • n.­473
  • n.­486-487
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­504-505
  • n.­507
  • n.­537
  • n.­583
  • n.­838
  • n.­840
  • n.­912
  • n.­1044
  • n.­1047
  • n.­1049
  • n.­1051
  • n.­1053
  • n.­1076
  • n.­1454
  • n.­1488
  • n.­1718
  • n.­1995
  • n.­2101
  • n.­2108
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2456-2457
  • n.­2474
  • n.­2613
  • n.­2662
  • n.­3231
  • g.­55
  • g.­328
  • g.­512
  • g.­861
  • g.­902
  • g.­1314
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1534
  • g.­1572
  • g.­1765
  • g.­1876
  • g.­1899
  • g.­1974
g.­997

Mañjughoṣa

Wylie:
  • ’jam pa’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་པའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjughoṣa
  • mañjusvara

“One with a sweet voice,” an epithet of the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī. The name is also written as “Mañjusvara.”

Located in 84 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­5
  • 2.­54
  • 2.­73
  • 2.­90-91
  • 2.­105
  • 2.­117
  • 2.­132
  • 2.­177
  • 4.­93
  • 5.­14
  • 11.­13
  • 14.­41
  • 15.­107
  • 15.­225
  • 15.­233
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­41-42
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­36
  • 27.­6
  • 27.­11
  • 27.­19
  • 27.­25-26
  • 28.­54
  • 30.­3
  • 30.­47
  • 31.­18
  • 32.­43
  • 33.­84-85
  • 35.­40
  • 35.­53
  • 35.­73
  • 35.­116-117
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­179
  • 35.­218
  • 35.­278
  • 35.­293
  • 35.­302
  • 38.­5
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­37
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­131
  • 52.­140
  • 52.­143-144
  • 53.­55
  • 53.­57
  • 53.­138
  • 53.­143-144
  • 53.­151
  • 53.­441
  • 53.­499
  • 53.­518
  • 53.­576-577
  • 53.­826
  • 53.­851
  • 53.­885
  • 54.­32
  • 54.­49
  • 54.­82
  • n.­595
  • n.­1046
  • n.­1286
  • n.­1312
  • n.­1314
  • n.­1623
  • n.­1627
  • n.­1640
  • n.­2493-2494
  • n.­2747
  • n.­2969
  • n.­3070
  • n.­6163
  • g.­999
g.­998

Mañjuśrī

Wylie:
  • ’jam dpal
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśrī
  • mañju

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Mañjuśrī is one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha” and a bodhisattva who embodies wisdom. He is a major figure in the Mahāyāna sūtras, appearing often as an interlocutor of the Buddha. In his most well-known iconographic form, he is portrayed bearing the sword of wisdom in his right hand and a volume of the Prajñā­pāramitā­sūtra in his left. To his name, Mañjuśrī, meaning “Gentle and Glorious One,” is often added the epithet Kumārabhūta, “having a youthful form.” He is also called Mañjughoṣa, Mañjusvara, and Pañcaśikha.

Located in 423 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1-3
  • i.­9
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­6-7
  • 1.­9-10
  • 1.­12
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16-19
  • 1.­21-22
  • 1.­30
  • 1.­32-33
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­67-69
  • 1.­72-73
  • 1.­106-109
  • 1.­111
  • 1.­118
  • 1.­121
  • 1.­123
  • 2.­1-4
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­10
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­20-21
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­49-50
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­78
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­87
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­98
  • 2.­106-111
  • 2.­118-119
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­147
  • 2.­149
  • 2.­153
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­168
  • 2.­179
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­194
  • 2.­199
  • 2.­207-208
  • 2.­211
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­3
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­85-87
  • 4.­116
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­7-9
  • 5.­21
  • 6.­1
  • 6.­3-5
  • 6.­13
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­15
  • 7.­17-23
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­5
  • 8.­11-12
  • 9.­1-2
  • 9.­19-22
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­57-58
  • 10.­60
  • 11.­1-3
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­20
  • 11.­153-154
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­192
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­273
  • 12.­1-3
  • 12.­53
  • 13.­1-2
  • 13.­72
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­181
  • 15.­99
  • 15.­105
  • 15.­243
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­13
  • 16.­24
  • 16.­32
  • 16.­34
  • 16.­36
  • 17.­38
  • 24.­243
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­1-3
  • 27.­18
  • 27.­29
  • 27.­38
  • 27.­44
  • 27.­87
  • 28.­1-2
  • 28.­4
  • 28.­8-9
  • 28.­11-12
  • 28.­24
  • 28.­27-28
  • 28.­32
  • 28.­36-39
  • 28.­43-44
  • 28.­55
  • 29.­1-3
  • 29.­5-10
  • 29.­15
  • 29.­19-20
  • 30.­1-2
  • 30.­15
  • 30.­52
  • 31.­1-3
  • 31.­62
  • 32.­1-2
  • 32.­36
  • 32.­45
  • 33.­1-2
  • 33.­87
  • 33.­126
  • 34.­1-2
  • 34.­13
  • 34.­31
  • 34.­36
  • 34.­52
  • 35.­2-3
  • 35.­5-6
  • 35.­49
  • 35.­54
  • 35.­56
  • 35.­60
  • 35.­294
  • 35.­299
  • 35.­302
  • 35.­306
  • 35.­308
  • 36.­1-10
  • 36.­14
  • 36.­18
  • 37.­1-2
  • 37.­30
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­75-76
  • 37.­107-109
  • 37.­111
  • 37.­113
  • 37.­115
  • 37.­124
  • 37.­126
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­4
  • 38.­7
  • 38.­10
  • 38.­51
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­50
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­32
  • 52.­149
  • 53.­56
  • 53.­141
  • 53.­145
  • 53.­149
  • 53.­574
  • 53.­920-921
  • 53.­924
  • 54.­1-3
  • 54.­7-8
  • 54.­60
  • 54.­63
  • 54.­65-66
  • 54.­82
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­99-105
  • n.­5
  • n.­99
  • n.­287
  • n.­305
  • n.­337
  • n.­339
  • n.­357
  • n.­383
  • n.­425-426
  • n.­440
  • n.­478
  • n.­568
  • n.­597
  • n.­612
  • n.­656
  • n.­658
  • n.­664
  • n.­781
  • n.­898
  • n.­907
  • n.­935
  • n.­1046
  • n.­1296
  • n.­1312
  • n.­1314
  • n.­1317
  • n.­1320
  • n.­1616
  • n.­1702
  • n.­1707
  • n.­1736-1737
  • n.­1747
  • n.­1757
  • n.­1804
  • n.­1900
  • n.­1980
  • n.­1983
  • n.­2023
  • n.­2062
  • n.­2245
  • n.­2441
  • n.­2457
  • n.­2459-2460
  • n.­2536
  • n.­2541
  • n.­2820
  • n.­2823-2825
  • n.­2828
  • n.­3014-3015
  • n.­3276
  • n.­3305
  • n.­3307-3309
  • n.­3311
  • n.­3332
  • n.­3334
  • n.­3346
  • n.­3381
  • n.­3383
  • g.­53
  • g.­55
  • g.­328
  • g.­412
  • g.­512
  • g.­595
  • g.­659
  • g.­688
  • g.­726
  • g.­791
  • g.­816
  • g.­861
  • g.­864
  • g.­902
  • g.­905
  • g.­906
  • g.­913
  • g.­933
  • g.­938
  • g.­939
  • g.­997
  • g.­1000
  • g.­1082
  • g.­1136
  • g.­1176
  • g.­1314
  • g.­1316
  • g.­1413
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1572
  • g.­1595
  • g.­1680
  • g.­1717
  • g.­1756
  • g.­1760
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1765
  • g.­1857
  • g.­1876
  • g.­1898
  • g.­1899
  • g.­1974
  • g.­1996
  • g.­2136
g.­999

Mañjusvara

Wylie:
  • ’jam pa’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་པའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjughoṣa
  • mañjusvara

See “Mañjughoṣa.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 27.­31
  • n.­1640
  • g.­997
g.­1012

māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

This term, usually occuring in the plural, is applied to the followers of Māra, or the personified negative forces in general.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­38
  • 4.­3
  • 8.­3
  • 11.­175
  • 16.­22
  • 17.­22
  • 53.­34
  • 54.­102
  • n.­1031
  • n.­2774
  • n.­4919
  • g.­498
  • g.­1013
g.­1023

master

Wylie:
  • slob dpon
Tibetan:
  • སློབ་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • ācārya

Teacher or master, especially a spiritual master. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “ācārya.”

Located in 74 passages in the translation:

  • i.­15
  • 1.­118
  • 2.­121
  • 2.­126-127
  • 2.­129-130
  • 2.­134
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­178
  • 2.­181
  • 2.­184
  • 2.­188
  • 2.­191-194
  • 2.­196-198
  • 2.­200-204
  • 2.­206-210
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­7-8
  • 4.­10
  • 11.­4-8
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­12
  • 11.­22-23
  • 11.­25-27
  • 11.­31-34
  • 11.­42
  • 11.­90
  • 14.­38
  • 28.­45
  • 34.­2
  • 35.­125
  • 37.­59
  • 54.­5
  • n.­370
  • n.­401
  • n.­436
  • n.­482-483
  • n.­492
  • n.­531
  • n.­537
  • n.­540
  • n.­781
  • n.­1048
  • n.­3315
  • g.­20
  • g.­1146
  • g.­1418
g.­1028

mātṛ

Wylie:
  • ma mo
Tibetan:
  • མ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātṛ

A class of female spirits, sometimes called mother goddesses.

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­103
  • 1.­105
  • 2.­83
  • 3.­6
  • 14.­76
  • 14.­166
  • 15.­186
  • 15.­188
  • 25.­7
  • 30.­18
  • 31.­43
  • 31.­55
  • 35.­84
  • 35.­102
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­143
  • 35.­171
  • 35.­201
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­83
  • 50.­5
  • 51.­52
  • 51.­71
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­910
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­47
  • n.­1079
  • n.­1259
  • n.­1865
  • n.­2474
  • g.­39
  • g.­44
  • g.­46
  • g.­300
  • g.­323
  • g.­611
  • g.­714
  • g.­716
  • g.­853
  • g.­923
  • g.­948
  • g.­1031
  • g.­1054
  • g.­1170
  • g.­1290
  • g.­1384
  • g.­1530
  • g.­1918
  • g.­1922
  • g.­1998
  • g.­2007
  • g.­2025
  • g.­2139
g.­1046

mleccha

Wylie:
  • kla klo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླ་ཀློ།
Sanskrit:
  • mleccha

This somewhat vague term is applied to people and societies outside the brahmanical fold, i.e., foreigners, indigenous tribal groups, etc. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “barbarian.”

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­506-508
  • 53.­511
  • 53.­578
  • 53.­580
  • 53.­661
  • 53.­751
  • 53.­824
  • 54.­91
  • n.­3005
  • n.­3011
  • n.­3073
  • n.­3127
  • g.­227
  • g.­602
  • g.­1583
g.­1052

mudrā

Wylie:
  • phyag rgya
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་རྒྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • mudrā

A particular position of hands of magical or esoteric significance; also an emblem or insignia.

Located in 631 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­4
  • i.­8
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­71
  • 2.­10
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­26
  • 2.­28
  • 2.­32
  • 2.­34
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­43-45
  • 2.­47
  • 2.­50-53
  • 2.­55-58
  • 2.­60
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­66
  • 2.­68
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­77
  • 2.­80
  • 2.­83-84
  • 2.­88
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­97
  • 2.­122
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­134-135
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­151-153
  • 2.­159
  • 2.­164
  • 2.­166-173
  • 2.­175-176
  • 2.­181
  • 2.­184
  • 2.­194
  • 2.­199
  • 2.­202-203
  • 3.­3
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­31
  • 9.­10
  • 11.­6
  • 13.­58
  • 13.­64
  • 14.­50
  • 15.­4
  • 26.­41
  • 27.­56
  • 28.­30
  • 31.­14
  • 31.­19
  • 31.­27-28
  • 31.­61
  • 33.­19
  • 34.­2-3
  • 34.­5-6
  • 34.­9-15
  • 34.­17-20
  • 34.­22
  • 34.­26-28
  • 34.­30-32
  • 34.­52
  • 35.­1-2
  • 35.­4-6
  • 35.­13
  • 35.­22
  • 35.­26
  • 35.­29
  • 35.­31-32
  • 35.­35-36
  • 35.­38-45
  • 35.­47-48
  • 35.­53
  • 35.­55-56
  • 35.­59-61
  • 35.­63-66
  • 35.­68
  • 35.­70-71
  • 35.­74
  • 35.­76
  • 35.­78
  • 35.­80
  • 35.­82-84
  • 35.­87-88
  • 35.­91-94
  • 35.­96-103
  • 35.­106-107
  • 35.­110
  • 35.­113
  • 35.­115
  • 35.­117-119
  • 35.­121
  • 35.­124-125
  • 35.­127-133
  • 35.­136
  • 35.­138-142
  • 35.­144-157
  • 35.­159-162
  • 35.­164
  • 35.­166
  • 35.­169-171
  • 35.­173-176
  • 35.­178-182
  • 35.­184-186
  • 35.­188-189
  • 35.­191-206
  • 35.­208-209
  • 35.­213-222
  • 35.­225-227
  • 35.­229-231
  • 35.­234-236
  • 35.­238-247
  • 35.­249
  • 35.­251-261
  • 35.­263
  • 35.­265-266
  • 35.­268
  • 35.­270-271
  • 35.­273-276
  • 35.­278
  • 35.­280
  • 35.­282-283
  • 35.­285-286
  • 35.­288-290
  • 35.­292
  • 35.­294-295
  • 35.­308
  • 36.­1-18
  • 37.­2-33
  • 37.­36-69
  • 37.­71-85
  • 37.­88-91
  • 37.­93
  • 37.­95
  • 37.­97-103
  • 37.­105-108
  • 37.­112-113
  • 37.­115-116
  • 37.­119
  • 37.­121-123
  • 37.­126
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­8
  • 38.­10
  • 38.­12
  • 38.­14
  • 38.­16-17
  • 38.­38
  • 38.­41
  • 38.­51
  • 51.­34
  • 52.­20
  • 52.­40
  • 52.­146
  • n.­284
  • n.­297
  • n.­305
  • n.­336
  • n.­350
  • n.­395
  • n.­429
  • n.­435
  • n.­443
  • n.­447
  • n.­480
  • n.­491
  • n.­493
  • n.­506
  • n.­536
  • n.­784
  • n.­1667
  • n.­1743-1745
  • n.­1875
  • n.­1913
  • n.­2003
  • n.­2005-2007
  • n.­2010
  • n.­2012-2013
  • n.­2024
  • n.­2026-2027
  • n.­2029
  • n.­2034
  • n.­2036
  • n.­2038
  • n.­2040
  • n.­2043
  • n.­2045-2046
  • n.­2048
  • n.­2050
  • n.­2058-2059
  • n.­2063
  • n.­2068
  • n.­2082
  • n.­2084
  • n.­2090
  • n.­2094-2096
  • n.­2104-2105
  • n.­2107-2108
  • n.­2124
  • n.­2126
  • n.­2128
  • n.­2131-2132
  • n.­2134
  • n.­2147
  • n.­2151
  • n.­2154-2156
  • n.­2159
  • n.­2163-2165
  • n.­2168
  • n.­2175
  • n.­2182
  • n.­2185
  • n.­2187-2190
  • n.­2192
  • n.­2195
  • n.­2198-2199
  • n.­2201
  • n.­2205-2206
  • n.­2209
  • n.­2211
  • n.­2213
  • n.­2216
  • n.­2220
  • n.­2223
  • n.­2225-2228
  • n.­2230
  • n.­2236
  • n.­2240
  • n.­2242
  • n.­2245
  • n.­2250
  • n.­2252
  • n.­2261-2262
  • n.­2265
  • n.­2267-2268
  • n.­2270-2271
  • n.­2274-2275
  • n.­2277
  • n.­2279
  • n.­2283-2284
  • n.­2286-2287
  • n.­2292
  • n.­2294
  • n.­2299
  • n.­2310
  • n.­2313
  • n.­2323-2324
  • n.­2326-2329
  • n.­2331-2333
  • n.­2335-2348
  • n.­2351
  • n.­2353
  • n.­2358
  • n.­2368
  • n.­2370
  • n.­2372
  • n.­2375
  • n.­2377
  • n.­2385
  • n.­2398
  • n.­2401
  • n.­2413
  • n.­2416
  • n.­2419-2421
  • n.­2432-2433
  • n.­2436
  • n.­2439
  • n.­2441-2442
  • n.­2456-2457
  • n.­3950
  • n.­4002
  • n.­4187
  • n.­5535
  • n.­5551
  • n.­5553
  • n.­5570
  • n.­5649
  • g.­486
  • g.­2054
g.­1056

Muni

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni

One of the sages (ṛṣi).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83
  • g.­1386
g.­1063

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 100 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 1.­80
  • 1.­82
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­160
  • 2.­170
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­6
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­100
  • 4.­103
  • 7.­18-19
  • 8.­8
  • 10.­1-2
  • 10.­6-7
  • 11.­127
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­30-31
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­49
  • 28.­36
  • 37.­34
  • 50.­5
  • 52.­25
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­100
  • 53.­172
  • 53.­183
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­338
  • 53.­425
  • 53.­530
  • 53.­762-763
  • 53.­799
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­104
  • n.­717
  • n.­725
  • n.­1516
  • n.­1557
  • n.­1592
  • n.­1757
  • n.­1775
  • n.­2859
  • n.­2934
  • n.­3026
  • n.­3104
  • n.­3186
  • n.­3312
  • g.­68
  • g.­96
  • g.­140
  • g.­266
  • g.­322
  • g.­357
  • g.­457
  • g.­497
  • g.­661
  • g.­673
  • g.­694
  • g.­780
  • g.­788
  • g.­790
  • g.­823
  • g.­907
  • g.­915
  • g.­976
  • g.­977
  • g.­993
  • g.­1070
  • g.­1087
  • g.­1114
  • g.­1118
  • g.­1142
  • g.­1181
  • g.­1366
  • g.­1444
  • g.­1445
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1745
  • g.­1752
  • g.­1847
  • g.­1854
  • g.­1864
  • g.­1877
  • g.­2019
  • g.­2092
g.­1078

nakṣatra

Wylie:
  • rgyu skar
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུ་སྐར།
Sanskrit:
  • nakṣatra

An asterism or constellation; also a class of deities.

Located in 121 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­95
  • 1.­97
  • 14.­70
  • 24.­4
  • 24.­6
  • 24.­8
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­12
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­35
  • 24.­43-44
  • 24.­47-48
  • 24.­52
  • 24.­54
  • 24.­64-65
  • 24.­69
  • 24.­74
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­81
  • 24.­86
  • 24.­91
  • 24.­97-98
  • 24.­103
  • 24.­105
  • 24.­107-108
  • 24.­112
  • 24.­115
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­129
  • 24.­131
  • 24.­134
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­140
  • 24.­144
  • 24.­180-182
  • 24.­207
  • 24.­212
  • 24.­214-215
  • 24.­218
  • 24.­220
  • 24.­223
  • 24.­225
  • 24.­233
  • 25.­1-2
  • 25.­7
  • 27.­33
  • 28.­27
  • 31.­10
  • 51.­68
  • 52.­19
  • 53.­910
  • n.­1363-1364
  • n.­1386
  • n.­1388-1389
  • n.­1398
  • n.­1403
  • n.­1406-1408
  • n.­1412
  • n.­1416
  • n.­1421
  • n.­1430
  • n.­1487
  • n.­2624
  • n.­3542
  • g.­12
  • g.­130
  • g.­139
  • g.­151
  • g.­161
  • g.­166
  • g.­174
  • g.­186
  • g.­231
  • g.­249
  • g.­351
  • g.­387
  • g.­396
  • g.­591
  • g.­609
  • g.­647
  • g.­648
  • g.­770
  • g.­848
  • g.­856
  • g.­886
  • g.­1051
  • g.­1055
  • g.­1081
  • g.­1190
  • g.­1191
  • g.­1192
  • g.­1253
  • g.­1265
  • g.­1266
  • g.­1278
  • g.­1287
  • g.­1338
  • g.­1345
  • g.­1485
  • g.­1546
  • g.­1552
  • g.­1697
  • g.­1740
  • g.­1792
  • g.­1827
  • g.­1905
  • g.­1907
  • g.­2095
g.­1124

Nirmāṇarati

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarati

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 53.­1
g.­1127

nirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • mya ngan las ’das pa
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirvāṇa

The state of “extinction,” said to be blissful and inviolable, where the afflictions are extinguished and one is not subject to ever be born again.

Located in 77 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­29
  • 1.­31
  • 1.­63-64
  • 1.­74
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­112
  • 2.­131
  • 7.­1-2
  • 9.­21
  • 11.­94
  • 11.­259
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­122
  • 15.­217
  • 17.­9
  • 24.­29
  • 24.­33
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­20
  • 32.­30
  • 33.­104
  • 34.­39-40
  • 34.­45
  • 34.­50-51
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­235
  • 35.­294
  • 35.­302
  • 37.­124
  • 38.­3
  • 38.­37
  • 50.­2
  • 51.­77
  • 53.­11
  • 53.­14-16
  • 53.­24
  • 53.­40
  • 53.­52
  • 53.­56-57
  • 53.­61
  • 53.­76
  • 53.­93
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­108-109
  • 53.­117
  • 53.­129
  • 53.­132
  • 53.­153
  • 53.­191
  • 53.­196
  • 53.­198
  • 53.­225
  • 53.­230
  • 53.­237
  • 53.­327
  • 53.­376
  • 53.­736
  • 54.­20
  • n.­623
  • n.­2794-2795
  • n.­2800
  • n.­2846
  • n.­2908
  • n.­2933
  • n.­6142
  • g.­153
  • g.­597
  • g.­1388
g.­1134

oblation

Wylie:
  • sbyin sreg
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱིན་སྲེག
Sanskrit:
  • homa

See “homa.”

Located in 89 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­135
  • 2.­137-138
  • 2.­182
  • 2.­192
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­5
  • 10.­5-6
  • 10.­8
  • 11.­156
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­30
  • 13.­34
  • 13.­36
  • 13.­61
  • 14.­67
  • 14.­69
  • 14.­88-89
  • 14.­102
  • 15.­4
  • 15.­6
  • 26.­24
  • 26.­27
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­38-39
  • 26.­42-46
  • 26.­53
  • 27.­48-53
  • 27.­56
  • 28.­11-14
  • 28.­18-27
  • 28.­32-34
  • 28.­44
  • 29.­9
  • 29.­11
  • 29.­16-17
  • 29.­19
  • 51.­35
  • 52.­18
  • 52.­21-22
  • 52.­38
  • 52.­62
  • 52.­87
  • n.­262
  • n.­401
  • n.­406-407
  • n.­1008
  • n.­1567
  • n.­1573
  • n.­1577
  • n.­1662
  • n.­1682
  • n.­1716
  • n.­1723-1724
  • n.­1748
  • n.­1799
  • n.­2628
  • n.­2766
  • g.­598
g.­1136

One Syllable

Wylie:
  • yig gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡིག་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ekākṣara

An epithet of deities, such as Mañjuśrī or Yamāntaka, whose mantras consists of a single syllable (ekākṣara).

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8-9
  • 1.­16
  • 3.­2
  • 9.­4
  • 14.­2
  • 14.­4-6
  • 14.­71
  • 14.­77
  • 14.­79-80
  • 14.­92
  • 14.­123
  • 14.­138
  • 14.­140
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­3
  • 26.­5
  • 26.­10
  • 26.­56-57
  • 26.­61
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­43-45
  • 35.­87
  • 37.­68-69
  • 38.­39
  • 50.­16
  • 53.­174
  • 53.­360
  • n.­20
  • n.­685
  • n.­1028
  • n.­1099
  • n.­1261
  • n.­1501
  • n.­1518
  • n.­1580
  • n.­1596-1598
  • n.­2342
  • n.­2360
  • n.­2502
  • n.­2504
  • n.­2841
  • n.­2924
g.­1139

pāda

Wylie:
  • tshig rkang
Tibetan:
  • ཚིག་རྐང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pāda

The fourth part of a regular stanza.

Located in 155 passages in the translation:

  • 33.­12
  • 33.­26
  • n.­556
  • n.­610
  • n.­802
  • n.­822
  • n.­829
  • n.­844
  • n.­876
  • n.­918-919
  • n.­921
  • n.­963
  • n.­974
  • n.­1036
  • n.­1051
  • n.­1072
  • n.­1081
  • n.­1090
  • n.­1104
  • n.­1110
  • n.­1159
  • n.­1194
  • n.­1204
  • n.­1215
  • n.­1240
  • n.­1251-1252
  • n.­1266
  • n.­1273-1274
  • n.­1301
  • n.­1314
  • n.­1337
  • n.­1341-1343
  • n.­1348
  • n.­1351
  • n.­1358
  • n.­1366-1367
  • n.­1392
  • n.­1402
  • n.­1413
  • n.­1419
  • n.­1433
  • n.­1438
  • n.­1445
  • n.­1457
  • n.­1459
  • n.­1466-1467
  • n.­1485
  • n.­1496-1497
  • n.­1499
  • n.­1676
  • n.­1679
  • n.­1777
  • n.­1826
  • n.­1848
  • n.­1875
  • n.­1910
  • n.­1917
  • n.­1920-1921
  • n.­1928-1929
  • n.­1955
  • n.­1962
  • n.­1969
  • n.­1972
  • n.­1976
  • n.­1985
  • n.­1992
  • n.­1998
  • n.­2008-2009
  • n.­2011-2012
  • n.­2048-2049
  • n.­2065
  • n.­2067
  • n.­2085
  • n.­2102-2103
  • n.­2111
  • n.­2120
  • n.­2161
  • n.­2168-2169
  • n.­2193
  • n.­2197
  • n.­2209
  • n.­2226
  • n.­2324
  • n.­2446
  • n.­2459
  • n.­2496
  • n.­2520
  • n.­2535
  • n.­2567
  • n.­2569
  • n.­2586
  • n.­2603
  • n.­2712
  • n.­2740
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2832
  • n.­2838
  • n.­2882
  • n.­2895
  • n.­2902-2903
  • n.­2939
  • n.­2955
  • n.­2969
  • n.­3039
  • n.­3069
  • n.­3071
  • n.­3083
  • n.­3090
  • n.­3126
  • n.­3128
  • n.­3132
  • n.­3134
  • n.­3140-3142
  • n.­3167
  • n.­3171
  • n.­3174
  • n.­3179-3180
  • n.­3193
  • n.­3216
  • n.­3221
  • n.­3230
  • n.­3275
  • n.­3287-3288
  • n.­3304
  • n.­3323
  • n.­3325
  • n.­3334
  • n.­3356
  • n.­3359-3360
  • n.­3362
  • n.­3371
  • n.­4493
  • n.­5573
  • n.­5670
g.­1169

Paranirmita

Wylie:
  • yongs su sprul pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་སྤྲུལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • paranirmita

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 53.­1
g.­1173

Parīttābha

Wylie:
  • ’od chung
  • dge chung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆུང་།
  • དགེ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttābha

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­157
  • 2.­167
  • 53.­1
g.­1203

piśāca

Wylie:
  • sha za
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • piśāca

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that, like several other classes of nonhuman beings, take spontaneous birth. Ranking below rākṣasas, they are less powerful and more akin to pretas. They are said to dwell in impure and perilous places, where they feed on impure things, including flesh. This could account for the name piśāca, which possibly derives from √piś, to carve or chop meat, as reflected also in the Tibetan sha za, “meat eater.” They are often described as having an unpleasant appearance, and at times they appear with animal bodies. Some possess the ability to enter the dead bodies of humans, thereby becoming so-called vetāla, to touch whom is fatal.

Located in 44 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­33
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­78
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­6
  • 11.­128
  • 24.­23
  • 26.­16
  • 28.­40
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­38
  • 32.­38
  • 35.­84
  • 37.­34
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 51.­71
  • 52.­123
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­380
  • 53.­392
  • 54.­16
  • n.­1259
  • n.­2314
  • n.­2934
  • n.­3290
  • g.­78
  • g.­111
  • g.­534
  • g.­535
  • g.­551
  • g.­1006
  • g.­1194
  • g.­1205
  • g.­1684
  • g.­1688
  • g.­1721
  • g.­1871
  • g.­2052
g.­1214

planet

Wylie:
  • gdon
  • gza’
Tibetan:
  • གདོན།
  • གཟའ།
Sanskrit:
  • graha

See “graha.”

Located in 86 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­75
  • 2.­120
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­30
  • 15.­73
  • 15.­153-154
  • 15.­156-157
  • 15.­164-165
  • 15.­168
  • 15.­171-173
  • 15.­176-177
  • 15.­180
  • 17.­1-2
  • 17.­27-28
  • 17.­35
  • 24.­1-2
  • 24.­4-5
  • 24.­20
  • 24.­36
  • 24.­44
  • 24.­50
  • 24.­59
  • 24.­64
  • 24.­76
  • 24.­79-80
  • 24.­89
  • 24.­98
  • 24.­104
  • 24.­111
  • 24.­116
  • 24.­118
  • 24.­182
  • 24.­186-187
  • 24.­218
  • 25.­1-2
  • 31.­11
  • 52.­122
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­702
  • 53.­710
  • 53.­910
  • n.­1172
  • n.­1229
  • n.­1231-1232
  • n.­1234
  • n.­1238
  • n.­1243
  • n.­1253
  • n.­1361-1362
  • n.­1391
  • n.­1396
  • n.­1399
  • n.­1407
  • n.­1409-1410
  • n.­1419
  • n.­1426
  • n.­1431
  • n.­1487
  • n.­1664
  • n.­2860
  • n.­3152
  • n.­3156
  • g.­128
  • g.­177
  • g.­308
  • g.­315
  • g.­548
  • g.­872
  • g.­1436
  • g.­1643
g.­1215

pledge

Wylie:
  • dam tshig
Tibetan:
  • དམ་ཚིག
Sanskrit:
  • samaya

See “samaya.”

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­71
  • 1.­73
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­46
  • 2.­59
  • 11.­4
  • 11.­149
  • 15.­104
  • 31.­6
  • 52.­146
  • n.­1872
  • g.­1418
g.­1235

Prahlāda

Wylie:
  • rab tu tshim byed
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་ཚིམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • pralhāda
  • prahlāda

One of the kings of the asuras; also, the king of all animals.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­92
  • 53.­912
  • 54.­69
g.­1251

pratyeka­buddha

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyeka­buddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 198 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­120
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­107-108
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­146
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­186-187
  • 2.­203
  • 2.­209
  • 4.­75
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­112-113
  • 4.­115
  • 5.­7
  • 7.­2
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­111
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­196-198
  • 11.­210
  • 11.­236
  • 12.­51
  • 14.­6
  • 15.­132
  • 15.­194
  • 17.­4
  • 25.­12-13
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­9
  • 30.­34
  • 34.­10
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­41
  • 37.­38
  • 37.­47
  • 37.­108
  • 38.­36
  • 38.­47
  • 38.­49
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­49
  • 51.­54
  • 52.­145
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­103
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­246
  • 53.­268-270
  • 53.­281
  • 53.­289
  • 53.­291-292
  • 53.­307
  • 53.­315
  • 53.­411
  • 53.­429
  • 53.­432-435
  • 53.­597
  • 53.­604-605
  • 53.­663
  • 53.­678
  • 53.­705-706
  • 53.­773
  • 54.­21
  • 54.­27
  • 54.­104
  • n.­122
  • n.­138
  • n.­584-585
  • n.­626
  • n.­725
  • n.­770
  • n.­1829
  • n.­2003
  • n.­2611
  • n.­2761
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2799
  • n.­2805
  • n.­2867
  • n.­2962
  • n.­2964
  • n.­3088
  • n.­3134
  • g.­28
  • g.­92
  • g.­107
  • g.­152
  • g.­258
  • g.­328
  • g.­347
  • g.­348
  • g.­402
  • g.­437
  • g.­456
  • g.­458
  • g.­512
  • g.­513
  • g.­613
  • g.­631
  • g.­657
  • g.­678
  • g.­728
  • g.­759
  • g.­797
  • g.­810
  • g.­818
  • g.­843
  • g.­844
  • g.­855
  • g.­944
  • g.­979
  • g.­1004
  • g.­1109
  • g.­1146
  • g.­1150
  • g.­1177
  • g.­1219
  • g.­1224
  • g.­1337
  • g.­1340
  • g.­1408
  • g.­1414
  • g.­1429
  • g.­1440
  • g.­1450
  • g.­1451
  • g.­1504
  • g.­1520
  • g.­1522
  • g.­1535
  • g.­1550
  • g.­1589
  • g.­1590
  • g.­1594
  • g.­1607
  • g.­1631
  • g.­1632
  • g.­1642
  • g.­1673
  • g.­1677
  • g.­1687
  • g.­1711
  • g.­1715
  • g.­1716
  • g.­1735
  • g.­1742
  • g.­1743
  • g.­1783
  • g.­1793
  • g.­1842
  • g.­1848
  • g.­1853
  • g.­1855
  • g.­1858
  • g.­1863
  • g.­1868
  • g.­1874
  • g.­1875
  • g.­1876
  • g.­1885
  • g.­1912
  • g.­2015
  • g.­2066
  • g.­2105
g.­1256

preta

Wylie:
  • yi dags
  • yi dwags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
  • ཡི་དྭགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 11.­128
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­19
  • 30.­22
  • 31.­40
  • 31.­55
  • 37.­62
  • 51.­41
  • 51.­71
  • 52.­21
  • 52.­115
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­410
  • 53.­427
  • 53.­474-475
  • 53.­477
  • 53.­481
  • 53.­634-636
  • 53.­672
  • 53.­907
  • 54.­71
  • 54.­92
  • 54.­101
  • n.­1817-1818
  • n.­2353
  • n.­2992
  • n.­6836
  • g.­2133
g.­1270

Puṇyaprasava

Wylie:
  • bsod nams skyes
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprasava

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­157
  • 53.­1
g.­1274

Pure Abode

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

The generic name of the five pure realms inhabited by the higher orders of gods.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­20-21
  • 1.­38
  • 2.­49
  • 4.­83
  • 12.­1
  • 16.­35
  • 17.­34
  • 35.­2
  • 53.­594
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­104
  • n.­10
  • n.­1324
  • n.­2828
  • n.­3393
  • g.­816
g.­1288

pūtana

Wylie:
  • srul po
Tibetan:
  • སྲུལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūtana

A class of demons.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 35.­84
  • 35.­134
  • 50.­6
  • 51.­71
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­48
  • n.­2491
  • g.­1289
g.­1293

Rāhu

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhu

One of the kings of asuras; the demon who is thought to cause an eclipse.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­92
  • 1.­94
  • 15.­157
  • 15.­163
  • 15.­169
  • 24.­203
  • 24.­205
  • 24.­216
  • 24.­218
  • 24.­222
  • 24.­224-226
  • n.­221
  • n.­1238
  • n.­1241
  • n.­1246
  • n.­1410
  • n.­1435
  • n.­1468
  • n.­3755
  • g.­548
g.­1299

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa
  • rakṣas

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­42
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75-76
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­209
  • 3.­6-7
  • 6.­11
  • 10.­6-7
  • 11.­128
  • 12.­15
  • 14.­75
  • 24.­22
  • 28.­40
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­42
  • 31.­55
  • 32.­38
  • 35.­81
  • 35.­102
  • 35.­202
  • 37.­63
  • 37.­74
  • 38.­28
  • 50.­10
  • 51.­41
  • 51.­63
  • 51.­70
  • 52.­16
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­122
  • 53.­98
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­379
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­47
  • n.­441
  • n.­515
  • n.­521
  • n.­725
  • n.­1817-1818
  • n.­2086
  • g.­67
  • g.­112
  • g.­263
  • g.­446
  • g.­534
  • g.­603
  • g.­796
  • g.­798
  • g.­841
  • g.­1074
  • g.­1075
  • g.­1301
  • g.­1333
  • g.­1402
  • g.­1420
  • g.­1447
  • g.­1619
  • g.­1648
  • g.­1734
  • g.­1805
  • g.­1806
  • g.­2030
  • g.­2036
  • g.­2133
  • g.­2153
g.­1316

Ratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i tog
  • rin chen tog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་ཏོག
  • རིན་ཆེན་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaketu

One of the tathāgatas attending the delivery of the MMK; the tathāgata who seems to be an emanation of Mañjuśrī, identified with the mantra bhrūṁ.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­39
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­4
  • 14.­29
  • 14.­48
  • 14.­102
  • 14.­105
  • 14.­111
  • 26.­5
  • 27.­4
  • 27.­27
  • 35.­122
  • 37.­110
  • n.­1024
  • n.­1054
  • n.­1087
  • n.­1527
  • n.­1551
  • n.­1651
  • g.­1325
g.­1322

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin

One of the eight tathāgatas.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­77
  • 5.­6
  • g.­1763
g.­1335

Realm of the Pure Abode

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

The highest division of the realm of form, comprising its five highest heavens; also used as the name of the gods living there. The name is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “Śuddhāvāsa.”

Located in 181 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­40
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­44
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­76
  • 1.­95
  • 1.­97
  • 1.­99
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­106-107
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­149
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­80
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­8
  • 6.­5
  • 11.­1
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­6
  • 15.­106
  • 16.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­36
  • 26.­1
  • 27.­1
  • 28.­1
  • 28.­54
  • 29.­1
  • 30.­1
  • 31.­1
  • 32.­1
  • 33.­1
  • 34.­1
  • 35.­1
  • 35.­307
  • 36.­1
  • 37.­1
  • 38.­1
  • 38.­9
  • 51.­1
  • 53.­54
  • 53.­151
  • 53.­919
  • 54.­1
  • n.­2236
  • n.­2768
  • n.­2785
  • g.­18
  • g.­29
  • g.­60
  • g.­74
  • g.­77
  • g.­82
  • g.­89
  • g.­102
  • g.­114
  • g.­116
  • g.­150
  • g.­167
  • g.­184
  • g.­199
  • g.­200
  • g.­237
  • g.­239
  • g.­264
  • g.­265
  • g.­272
  • g.­277
  • g.­282
  • g.­285
  • g.­306
  • g.­307
  • g.­313
  • g.­330
  • g.­335
  • g.­340
  • g.­366
  • g.­367
  • g.­375
  • g.­388
  • g.­392
  • g.­394
  • g.­454
  • g.­474
  • g.­481
  • g.­574
  • g.­614
  • g.­624
  • g.­655
  • g.­667
  • g.­668
  • g.­720
  • g.­740
  • g.­777
  • g.­779
  • g.­821
  • g.­822
  • g.­842
  • g.­847
  • g.­859
  • g.­860
  • g.­863
  • g.­864
  • g.­892
  • g.­911
  • g.­927
  • g.­933
  • g.­978
  • g.­980
  • g.­981
  • g.­988
  • g.­989
  • g.­1007
  • g.­1034
  • g.­1066
  • g.­1079
  • g.­1080
  • g.­1105
  • g.­1116
  • g.­1117
  • g.­1162
  • g.­1176
  • g.­1233
  • g.­1243
  • g.­1307
  • g.­1309
  • g.­1344
  • g.­1362
  • g.­1372
  • g.­1404
  • g.­1407
  • g.­1409
  • g.­1482
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1519
  • g.­1536
  • g.­1537
  • g.­1560
  • g.­1571
  • g.­1585
  • g.­1598
  • g.­1602
  • g.­1617
  • g.­1621
  • g.­1622
  • g.­1633
  • g.­1634
  • g.­1669
  • g.­1698
  • g.­1704
  • g.­1706
  • g.­1722
  • g.­1744
  • g.­1747
  • g.­1758
  • g.­1777
  • g.­1831
  • g.­2009
  • g.­2016
  • g.­2057
  • g.­2059
  • g.­2061
  • g.­2070
  • g.­2071
  • g.­2072
  • g.­2106
  • g.­2126
  • g.­2148
g.­1336

realm of the Thirty-Three

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tṛdaśa

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 11.­159
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­49
  • 54.­67
  • g.­1443
g.­1341

rite

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karman

A rite that is meant to accomplish an activity (such as pacifying, nourishing, etc.). This term is also translated in other instances as “activity,” “karma,” “karman,” or “karmic accumulation.” In the latter three cases the term refers to karmic accumulation, positive or negative, that will produce results in the future, unless it is purified.

Located in 398 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­6
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­33
  • 2.­50-51
  • 2.­57
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­80
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­88
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­94
  • 2.­99
  • 2.­101
  • 2.­113
  • 2.­127
  • 2.­131
  • 2.­137
  • 2.­192
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­20
  • 4.­26
  • 4.­29
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­53-54
  • 4.­114
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­12
  • 7.­9
  • 7.­11
  • 7.­13
  • 7.­23
  • 8.­7
  • 9.­4
  • 9.­20-21
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­30
  • 10.­35
  • 10.­40
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­57
  • 10.­59
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­3-4
  • 11.­6
  • 11.­14
  • 11.­60-61
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­158
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­185
  • 11.­193
  • 11.­208-209
  • 11.­228
  • 11.­264
  • 11.­266-267
  • 11.­269
  • 11.­273
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­4-5
  • 12.­11-12
  • 12.­15-16
  • 12.­24
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­15-16
  • 13.­19-21
  • 13.­23-24
  • 13.­34
  • 13.­37-38
  • 13.­40
  • 13.­43-46
  • 13.­50
  • 13.­53
  • 13.­55
  • 13.­58-59
  • 13.­64
  • 13.­68
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­37
  • 14.­41
  • 14.­66
  • 14.­71-73
  • 14.­77-80
  • 14.­88
  • 14.­92-94
  • 14.­100-101
  • 14.­106
  • 14.­115
  • 14.­124
  • 14.­154
  • 14.­157
  • 14.­167
  • 14.­171
  • 14.­173-174
  • 14.­176
  • 14.­179-180
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­68
  • 15.­92
  • 15.­202
  • 17.­31-32
  • 24.­8
  • 24.­106
  • 24.­180
  • 24.­186
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­35
  • 26.­5
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­23-24
  • 26.­26
  • 26.­32
  • 26.­38-40
  • 26.­43
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­58
  • 26.­63
  • 27.­16-17
  • 27.­20
  • 27.­32
  • 27.­43
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­49-50
  • 27.­52
  • 27.­54-55
  • 27.­57-59
  • 27.­61
  • 27.­63-64
  • 27.­66-75
  • 27.­77-84
  • 27.­86-87
  • 28.­1
  • 28.­8-10
  • 28.­12
  • 28.­23
  • 28.­28
  • 28.­30-32
  • 28.­34-35
  • 28.­42
  • 28.­45
  • 28.­52
  • 29.­2
  • 29.­8
  • 29.­19-20
  • 30.­23-24
  • 30.­45
  • 31.­26
  • 31.­28
  • 32.­13
  • 32.­22-23
  • 32.­41
  • 33.­23
  • 33.­40-42
  • 33.­46-47
  • 33.­49
  • 33.­81-82
  • 33.­87
  • 33.­105
  • 33.­116
  • 34.­18
  • 34.­25
  • 34.­28
  • 35.­38
  • 35.­48
  • 35.­50
  • 35.­54
  • 35.­57
  • 35.­60-61
  • 35.­64
  • 35.­70
  • 35.­77
  • 35.­135
  • 35.­137
  • 35.­142
  • 35.­144
  • 35.­173
  • 35.­175
  • 35.­179
  • 35.­206
  • 35.­208
  • 35.­218-219
  • 35.­253
  • 35.­258
  • 35.­260-261
  • 35.­268
  • 35.­270
  • 35.­289
  • 35.­291
  • 36.­1-2
  • 36.­15-16
  • 37.­2
  • 37.­6
  • 37.­20-22
  • 37.­25-26
  • 37.­42
  • 37.­97
  • 37.­106
  • 37.­111
  • 38.­49
  • 50.­3
  • 51.­25
  • 51.­29
  • 51.­34
  • 51.­36
  • 51.­46
  • 51.­49
  • 51.­74
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­10
  • 52.­17-19
  • 52.­21-22
  • 52.­24
  • 52.­33
  • 52.­38
  • 52.­44
  • 52.­53
  • 52.­61
  • 52.­67
  • 52.­69
  • 52.­75
  • 52.­85-86
  • 52.­116
  • 52.­124
  • 52.­136-137
  • 52.­140
  • 53.­436-438
  • 53.­922
  • 54.­12
  • 54.­34
  • 54.­38
  • 54.­52
  • 54.­80-82
  • n.­5
  • n.­320
  • n.­437
  • n.­457
  • n.­468
  • n.­512
  • n.­545
  • n.­549
  • n.­664
  • n.­685
  • n.­758
  • n.­767
  • n.­769
  • n.­774
  • n.­915
  • n.­928
  • n.­951-952
  • n.­974
  • n.­1014
  • n.­1030
  • n.­1034
  • n.­1053
  • n.­1078
  • n.­1174
  • n.­1301
  • n.­1424
  • n.­1519
  • n.­1591
  • n.­1607
  • n.­1654
  • n.­1660
  • n.­1663
  • n.­1668
  • n.­1675-1676
  • n.­1679-1680
  • n.­1729
  • n.­1776
  • n.­1821
  • n.­1887-1888
  • n.­1893
  • n.­1979
  • n.­1990
  • n.­2156
  • n.­2228
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2420
  • n.­2433
  • n.­2445
  • n.­2483
  • n.­2596-2597
  • n.­2602
  • n.­2631
  • n.­2643
  • n.­2694
  • n.­2709
  • n.­2739
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2985
  • n.­2991
  • n.­3254
  • n.­4689
  • g.­25
  • g.­71
  • g.­256
  • g.­695
  • g.­984
  • g.­1036
  • g.­1106
  • g.­1107
  • g.­1338
  • g.­1755
g.­1349

ṛṣi

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi

Sage; also a class of semidivine beings.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­164
  • 2.­170
  • 2.­209
  • 31.­53
  • 32.­38
  • 37.­39
  • 37.­73
  • 37.­120
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­122
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­124
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­184
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­311
  • 53.­554
  • 53.­909
  • 54.­104
  • n.­222
  • n.­1429
  • n.­1873
  • n.­2801
  • n.­3045
  • g.­38
  • g.­40
  • g.­42
  • g.­80
  • g.­129
  • g.­179
  • g.­193
  • g.­238
  • g.­527
  • g.­615
  • g.­619
  • g.­767
  • g.­768
  • g.­1017
  • g.­1056
  • g.­1057
  • g.­1171
  • g.­1172
  • g.­1201
  • g.­1202
  • g.­1263
  • g.­1367
  • g.­1916
  • g.­1990
  • g.­2014
  • g.­2122
  • g.­2155
g.­1351

Rudra

Wylie:
  • drag po
Tibetan:
  • དྲག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rudra

The wrathful form of Śiva.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­40
  • 32.­40
  • 35.­135
  • 35.­141
  • 35.­144
  • 53.­908
  • n.­2105
  • n.­2109
  • g.­279
  • g.­612
  • g.­946
g.­1357

Śacī

Wylie:
  • bde sogs
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་སོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śacī

The wife of Śakra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­36
  • 54.­56
  • n.­3337
g.­1363

sādhana

Wylie:
  • sgrub thabs
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲུབ་ཐབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sādhana

A formal practice usually organized into sessions, which involves mantra and visualization.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 1.­33
  • 2.­201
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­63
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­13
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­20
  • 9.­22
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­155
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­6-10
  • 26.­12
  • 26.­14-15
  • 26.­19-22
  • 26.­24-25
  • 26.­27-28
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­32-36
  • 26.­48-49
  • 26.­51
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­58
  • 28.­1
  • 33.­19
  • 33.­32
  • 53.­358
  • 53.­382
  • 53.­435
  • n.­758
  • n.­1462
  • n.­1541
  • n.­1557
  • n.­1680
  • n.­2679
g.­1367

sage

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi

See “ṛṣi.”

Located in 143 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­82
  • 1.­84
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­168
  • 2.­170
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­109
  • 6.­10
  • 10.­23
  • 11.­23
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­94
  • 11.­108
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­143-145
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­172
  • 11.­184
  • 11.­187
  • 11.­201
  • 11.­227
  • 11.­256
  • 12.­45
  • 12.­48
  • 13.­20-21
  • 14.­4
  • 14.­9
  • 14.­17
  • 14.­28-29
  • 14.­69
  • 14.­74
  • 14.­76
  • 14.­105
  • 15.­84
  • 15.­107
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­221-222
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­12-14
  • 16.­18-19
  • 16.­31
  • 17.­33
  • 24.­21
  • 24.­28
  • 25.­19
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­32-33
  • 30.­47
  • 31.­36
  • 32.­28
  • 33.­39
  • 33.­118
  • 34.­13
  • 34.­29
  • 34.­34-35
  • 34.­37
  • 35.­113
  • 35.­116
  • 35.­167
  • 35.­171
  • 35.­195
  • 35.­214
  • 35.­290
  • 35.­293
  • 53.­37
  • 53.­71
  • 53.­75
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­113-115
  • 53.­120
  • 53.­127
  • 53.­164
  • 53.­180
  • 53.­187
  • 53.­190
  • 53.­197
  • 53.­251
  • 53.­294
  • 53.­599
  • 53.­606
  • 53.­848
  • 53.­856
  • 53.­919
  • 53.­921
  • 54.­55
  • 54.­57-58
  • 54.­63
  • 54.­72
  • 54.­88
  • n.­848
  • n.­1038
  • n.­1429
  • n.­1517
  • n.­1891
  • n.­1995
  • n.­2131
  • n.­2160
  • n.­2181
  • n.­3368
  • g.­38
  • g.­40
  • g.­42
  • g.­80
  • g.­129
  • g.­179
  • g.­193
  • g.­238
  • g.­527
  • g.­615
  • g.­619
  • g.­767
  • g.­768
  • g.­1017
  • g.­1056
  • g.­1057
  • g.­1171
  • g.­1172
  • g.­1201
  • g.­1202
  • g.­1263
  • g.­1349
  • g.­1386
  • g.­1501
  • g.­1689
  • g.­1916
  • g.­1990
  • g.­2014
  • g.­2122
  • g.­2155
g.­1380

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra

See “Indra.”

Located in 47 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 2.­115
  • 2.­138
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­36
  • 5.­8
  • 9.­19
  • 11.­159
  • 14.­75
  • 14.­135
  • 24.­39
  • 32.­10
  • 32.­40
  • 33.­99
  • 35.­103
  • 35.­107
  • 38.­21
  • 51.­43
  • 52.­139
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­18
  • 53.­49
  • 53.­210
  • 53.­373
  • 53.­462
  • 53.­466
  • 53.­678
  • 53.­901
  • 53.­903
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­66-68
  • n.­2066
  • n.­2069
  • n.­2088
  • n.­2114
  • n.­2786
  • n.­2984
  • n.­3337
  • n.­3349
  • n.­3643
  • n.­6103
  • g.­602
  • g.­1357
g.­1385

Śākya Lodrö

Wylie:
  • shAkya blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • (not in the skt. source of the mmk)

The name of an important translator who was active during the early Sarma (gsar ma) period (c. 11th century).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • c.­1
g.­1386

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An epithet for the historical Buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama: he was a muni (“sage”) from the Śākya clan. He is counted as the fourth of the first four buddhas of the present Good Eon, the other three being Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, and Kāśyapa. He will be followed by Maitreya, the next buddha in this eon.

Located in 275 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­4
  • 1.­8-10
  • 1.­12
  • 1.­19-22
  • 1.­30-32
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­39
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­44
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51-52
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­67
  • 1.­84
  • 1.­101
  • 1.­107-108
  • 2.­136
  • 2.­139-140
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­150
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­183
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­82
  • 4.­84-85
  • 4.­88
  • 4.­102
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3-5
  • 5.­7
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­6
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­3
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­1
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­151
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­170
  • 11.­199
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­47
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1-4
  • 14.­6-7
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­105-106
  • 16.­1
  • 17.­1-2
  • 24.­1
  • 24.­3
  • 25.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­12
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­62
  • 27.­1
  • 28.­1-2
  • 29.­1
  • 29.­3
  • 30.­1
  • 31.­1
  • 31.­3
  • 32.­1
  • 33.­1
  • 34.­1
  • 35.­1-3
  • 35.­5
  • 36.­1
  • 37.­1
  • 37.­110
  • 37.­123
  • 38.­1
  • 52.­1
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­190
  • 53.­855
  • 54.­1
  • 54.­97
  • 54.­99
  • 54.­101
  • n.­99
  • n.­418
  • n.­583
  • n.­597
  • n.­838
  • n.­861
  • n.­911
  • n.­986
  • n.­1308
  • n.­1310
  • n.­1635
  • n.­1834
  • n.­1836
  • n.­2014
  • n.­2160
  • n.­2460
  • n.­2492
  • n.­2768
  • n.­2788
  • n.­2894
  • n.­2905
  • n.­2910
  • n.­2914
  • n.­2929
  • n.­3060
  • n.­3248
  • n.­3294
  • n.­3305
  • n.­3368
  • n.­3390
  • g.­18
  • g.­29
  • g.­60
  • g.­74
  • g.­77
  • g.­82
  • g.­89
  • g.­102
  • g.­114
  • g.­116
  • g.­150
  • g.­167
  • g.­184
  • g.­199
  • g.­200
  • g.­232
  • g.­237
  • g.­239
  • g.­264
  • g.­265
  • g.­272
  • g.­277
  • g.­282
  • g.­285
  • g.­306
  • g.­307
  • g.­313
  • g.­330
  • g.­335
  • g.­340
  • g.­366
  • g.­367
  • g.­375
  • g.­388
  • g.­392
  • g.­394
  • g.­454
  • g.­474
  • g.­481
  • g.­574
  • g.­614
  • g.­624
  • g.­655
  • g.­667
  • g.­668
  • g.­691
  • g.­720
  • g.­740
  • g.­777
  • g.­779
  • g.­821
  • g.­822
  • g.­830
  • g.­842
  • g.­847
  • g.­859
  • g.­860
  • g.­863
  • g.­864
  • g.­879
  • g.­892
  • g.­911
  • g.­927
  • g.­933
  • g.­978
  • g.­980
  • g.­981
  • g.­988
  • g.­989
  • g.­1007
  • g.­1034
  • g.­1066
  • g.­1079
  • g.­1080
  • g.­1105
  • g.­1116
  • g.­1117
  • g.­1162
  • g.­1176
  • g.­1233
  • g.­1243
  • g.­1307
  • g.­1309
  • g.­1344
  • g.­1362
  • g.­1369
  • g.­1372
  • g.­1404
  • g.­1407
  • g.­1409
  • g.­1424
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1482
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1519
  • g.­1536
  • g.­1537
  • g.­1560
  • g.­1571
  • g.­1579
  • g.­1585
  • g.­1603
  • g.­1617
  • g.­1621
  • g.­1622
  • g.­1633
  • g.­1634
  • g.­1669
  • g.­1698
  • g.­1704
  • g.­1706
  • g.­1722
  • g.­1744
  • g.­1747
  • g.­1758
  • g.­1777
  • g.­1831
  • g.­2009
  • g.­2016
  • g.­2017
  • g.­2057
  • g.­2059
  • g.­2061
  • g.­2070
  • g.­2071
  • g.­2072
  • g.­2126
  • g.­2148
g.­1393

Samādhi

Wylie:
  • ting ’dzin
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་འཛིན།
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2-4
  • 1.­14-15
  • 1.­18-19
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­38
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­57
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­68-69
  • 1.­107-108
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­106-108
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­199
  • 15.­242
  • 17.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 35.­1-2
  • 50.­4
  • 50.­19
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­33
  • 53.­43
  • 53.­76
  • n.­12
  • n.­32
  • n.­1344
  • n.­2320
  • n.­2506
  • n.­2758
  • n.­3318
  • g.­829
g.­1418

samaya

Wylie:
  • dam tshig
Tibetan:
  • དམ་ཚིག
Sanskrit:
  • samaya

A commitment that binds a mantra practitioner with their deity and their master. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “pledge.”

Located in 106 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • i.­15
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­73
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­22
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­89
  • 2.­95
  • 2.­106
  • 2.­108-110
  • 2.­113-116
  • 2.­123
  • 2.­196
  • 2.­202
  • 2.­208
  • 4.­5-6
  • 7.­7
  • 7.­12
  • 8.­7
  • 10.­45
  • 11.­4-6
  • 11.­30
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­173
  • 11.­188
  • 11.­191
  • 11.­256
  • 12.­2
  • 15.­105
  • 17.­35
  • 24.­2
  • 34.­2
  • 34.­6
  • 34.­9
  • 36.­5
  • 37.­25
  • 37.­27-29
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­66
  • 37.­104
  • 37.­106
  • 37.­108
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­11
  • 50.­31-33
  • 50.­41
  • 50.­46
  • 50.­48
  • 51.­53-54
  • 52.­12
  • 52.­50
  • 52.­62
  • 52.­92
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­146
  • 54.­5-6
  • n.­319
  • n.­357
  • n.­367
  • n.­491
  • n.­636
  • n.­746
  • n.­781
  • n.­784
  • n.­879
  • n.­945
  • n.­2106
  • n.­2310
  • n.­2344-2346
  • n.­2433
  • n.­2457
  • n.­2493
  • n.­2519-2520
  • n.­2528
  • n.­2535
  • n.­2613
  • n.­2708
  • n.­2729
  • n.­3318
  • g.­1215
g.­1433

saṃsāra

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃsāra

The beginningless cycle of birth and death within the six realms of conditioned existence.

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­59
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­106
  • 4.­59
  • 4.­108
  • 5.­13
  • 11.­86
  • 11.­88
  • 11.­92
  • 11.­140
  • 11.­193
  • 14.­86
  • 14.­122
  • 15.­195
  • 16.­29
  • 17.­3
  • 24.­29
  • 24.­32
  • 32.­20
  • 33.­93-94
  • 33.­101
  • 34.­32
  • 34.­37
  • 35.­191
  • 35.­229
  • 51.­78
  • 53.­42
  • 53.­53
  • 53.­75
  • 53.­247
  • 53.­455
  • 53.­673
  • 54.­20
  • n.­821
  • n.­826
  • n.­1319
  • n.­1989
  • n.­2175
  • n.­3579
  • g.­37
  • g.­296
g.­1438

saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅgha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Though often specifically reserved for the monastic community, this term can be applied to any of the four Buddhist communities‍—monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen‍—as well as to identify the different groups of practitioners, like the community of bodhisattvas or the community of śrāvakas. It is also the third of the Three Jewels (triratna) of Buddhism: the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Community.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • 2.­196
  • 26.­15
  • 26.­30
  • 35.­41
  • 35.­282-283
  • 50.­44
  • 53.­629
  • 53.­675
  • g.­490
  • g.­1782
g.­1439

Sañjīva

Wylie:
  • yang sos
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་སོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sañjīva

“Reviving,” one of the hells.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­239
  • 11.­243
  • 53.­671
  • 54.­73
g.­1452

Śāntamati

Wylie:
  • blo gros zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāntamati

One of the sixteen great bodhisattvas. The content of the list varies from text to text.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­74
  • 5.­5
  • 52.­1
  • 52.­4
  • 52.­9-10
  • 52.­13
g.­1459

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra

One of the śrāvakas attending the delivery of the MMK; one of the eight great śrāvakas.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 4.­81
  • 5.­7
  • 11.­196
  • 53.­1
g.­1500

sense bases

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 33.­89
  • 54.­6
  • n.­3318
g.­1502

siddha

Wylie:
  • grub pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddha

Accomplished being; also a class of semidivine beings similar to vidyādharas.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­209
  • 4.­85
  • 9.­19
  • 10.­6
  • 14.­129
  • 14.­132
  • 15.­86
  • 26.­7
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­35
  • 37.­35
  • 53.­124
  • 53.­126
  • 53.­234
  • 53.­909
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­47
  • 54.­104
  • n.­764
  • n.­1103
  • n.­1530
  • g.­919
g.­1508

siddhi

Wylie:
  • dngos grub
Tibetan:
  • དངོས་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhi

See “accomplishment.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • n.­764
  • n.­3364
  • n.­4867
  • n.­4916
  • n.­5004
  • g.­22
g.­1525

Sitātapatra

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor gdugs dkar po
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་གདུགས་དཀར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sitātapatra

One of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­43
  • 2.­145
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­56
  • 30.­50
  • 35.­39
  • 35.­275
  • 37.­11
  • 38.­17
  • 53.­360
  • n.­1538
  • n.­1548
  • n.­1618
  • n.­2464
  • n.­6284
g.­1527

Śiva

Wylie:
  • zhi ba
  • lha chen
  • dbang ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ།
  • ལྷ་ཆེན།
  • དབང་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • śiva

The god Śiva. Also referred to in the MMK as Maheśvara.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 2.­94
  • 6.­11
  • 14.­75
  • 35.­134
  • 35.­216
  • n.­572
  • n.­1502
  • n.­1820
  • n.­1940
  • n.­2105
  • n.­2739
  • n.­2786
  • n.­3483
  • g.­274
  • g.­365
  • g.­612
  • g.­706
  • g.­900
  • g.­946
  • g.­1092
  • g.­1351
  • g.­1376
  • g.­1441
  • g.­1528
  • g.­1832
  • g.­1834
g.­1540

sphere of phenomena

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbyings
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབྱིངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhātu

Things as they truly are, with nothing imputed to them through dualistic thinking. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “dharmadhātu.”

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­44
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­55
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­116-117
  • 25.­16
  • 25.­20
  • 33.­2
  • 35.­217
  • 37.­111
  • 52.­11
  • 54.­52-53
  • 54.­81
  • 54.­104
  • n.­1498
  • n.­1500
  • n.­1900
  • n.­3380
  • g.­404
g.­1543

śrāvaka

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

Located in 338 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • i.­6
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­38
  • 1.­61
  • 1.­63-64
  • 1.­66
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­120
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­107-108
  • 2.­139
  • 2.­143
  • 2.­183-184
  • 2.­186-187
  • 2.­203-204
  • 2.­209
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­113
  • 4.­115
  • 5.­7
  • 7.­2
  • 8.­8
  • 8.­10
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­143
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­178
  • 11.­196-198
  • 11.­210
  • 11.­236
  • 12.­51
  • 14.­6
  • 15.­132
  • 15.­193
  • 17.­4
  • 25.­12-13
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­9
  • 30.­33
  • 34.­10
  • 35.­5
  • 35.­302
  • 37.­47
  • 37.­108
  • 38.­36-37
  • 38.­48-49
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­49
  • 52.­145
  • 53.­2
  • 53.­8
  • 53.­14
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­66
  • 53.­73
  • 53.­84
  • 53.­87
  • 53.­95
  • 53.­105
  • 53.­112
  • 53.­117
  • 53.­119
  • 53.­128
  • 53.­136-137
  • 53.­142
  • 53.­146
  • 53.­159
  • 53.­174
  • 53.­178
  • 53.­204
  • 53.­210
  • 53.­216
  • 53.­239
  • 53.­241
  • 53.­245-246
  • 53.­251
  • 53.­253
  • 53.­266
  • 53.­315
  • 53.­404-405
  • 53.­678
  • 53.­718-719
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­21
  • 54.­27
  • 54.­104
  • n.­26
  • n.­138
  • n.­626
  • n.­770
  • n.­1327
  • n.­2003
  • n.­2366
  • n.­2475
  • n.­2611
  • n.­2775
  • n.­2818
  • n.­2866-2867
  • n.­2885
  • n.­2901
  • n.­2948
  • n.­2964
  • g.­43
  • g.­95
  • g.­97
  • g.­99
  • g.­110
  • g.­121
  • g.­134
  • g.­138
  • g.­158
  • g.­165
  • g.­178
  • g.­213
  • g.­229
  • g.­230
  • g.­234
  • g.­248
  • g.­259
  • g.­260
  • g.­384
  • g.­386
  • g.­393
  • g.­395
  • g.­403
  • g.­413
  • g.­415
  • g.­430
  • g.­431
  • g.­432
  • g.­434
  • g.­447
  • g.­452
  • g.­453
  • g.­455
  • g.­478
  • g.­479
  • g.­519
  • g.­524
  • g.­528
  • g.­529
  • g.­537
  • g.­570
  • g.­571
  • g.­581
  • g.­625
  • g.­633
  • g.­635
  • g.­636
  • g.­638
  • g.­657
  • g.­689
  • g.­696
  • g.­697
  • g.­712
  • g.­715
  • g.­722
  • g.­737
  • g.­746
  • g.­751
  • g.­755
  • g.­792
  • g.­794
  • g.­803
  • g.­804
  • g.­835
  • g.­837
  • g.­840
  • g.­891
  • g.­901
  • g.­902
  • g.­910
  • g.­918
  • g.­925
  • g.­931
  • g.­934
  • g.­936
  • g.­949
  • g.­952
  • g.­954
  • g.­956
  • g.­974
  • g.­1003
  • g.­1008
  • g.­1009
  • g.­1032
  • g.­1062
  • g.­1085
  • g.­1087
  • g.­1088
  • g.­1090
  • g.­1091
  • g.­1097
  • g.­1128
  • g.­1132
  • g.­1145
  • g.­1147
  • g.­1148
  • g.­1151
  • g.­1152
  • g.­1157
  • g.­1161
  • g.­1193
  • g.­1196
  • g.­1197
  • g.­1200
  • g.­1212
  • g.­1234
  • g.­1237
  • g.­1244
  • g.­1252
  • g.­1254
  • g.­1258
  • g.­1266
  • g.­1275
  • g.­1282
  • g.­1283
  • g.­1285
  • g.­1291
  • g.­1294
  • g.­1305
  • g.­1328
  • g.­1331
  • g.­1346
  • g.­1394
  • g.­1397
  • g.­1401
  • g.­1410
  • g.­1416
  • g.­1430
  • g.­1432
  • g.­1455
  • g.­1457
  • g.­1459
  • g.­1533
  • g.­1542
  • g.­1545
  • g.­1551
  • g.­1552
  • g.­1555
  • g.­1561
  • g.­1565
  • g.­1566
  • g.­1569
  • g.­1580
  • g.­1582
  • g.­1604
  • g.­1625
  • g.­1628
  • g.­1629
  • g.­1652
  • g.­1657
  • g.­1667
  • g.­1668
  • g.­1670
  • g.­1671
  • g.­1672
  • g.­1690
  • g.­1713
  • g.­1714
  • g.­1723
  • g.­1738
  • g.­1739
  • g.­1783
  • g.­1793
  • g.­1798
  • g.­1799
  • g.­1801
  • g.­1807
  • g.­1820
  • g.­1837
  • g.­1841
  • g.­1843
  • g.­1845
  • g.­1849
  • g.­1851
  • g.­1852
  • g.­1856
  • g.­1861
  • g.­1862
  • g.­1864
  • g.­1865
  • g.­1866
  • g.­1869
  • g.­1870
  • g.­1872
  • g.­1879
  • g.­1880
  • g.­1881
  • g.­1883
  • g.­1886
  • g.­1887
  • g.­1893
  • g.­1901
  • g.­1994
  • g.­2004
  • g.­2005
  • g.­2012
  • g.­2016
  • g.­2024
  • g.­2050
  • g.­2073
  • g.­2085
  • g.­2096
  • g.­2100
  • g.­2101
  • g.­2143
  • g.­2144
  • g.­2145
  • g.­2146
g.­1558

Śrīmati

Wylie:
  • dpal dang blo gros
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་དང་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrīmati

It is not clear who this name refers to.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 54.­82
g.­1596

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • legs ldan mthong
  • legs mthong
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་ལྡན་མཐོང་།
  • ལེགས་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there; the city of Indra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­157
  • 54.­68
g.­1602

Śuddhāvāsa

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

See “Realm of the Pure Abode.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • g.­1335
g.­1609

Sudharmā

Wylie:
  • ’dun sa chos bzang
Tibetan:
  • འདུན་ས་ཆོས་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sudharmā

The assembly hall of the gods.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 54.­68
g.­1616

Sugata

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata

“Bliss-gone one”; an epithet of the Buddha or a tathāgata.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­32
  • 27.­3
  • 31.­2
  • 37.­41
  • 50.­3
  • 51.­75
  • 53.­765
  • 54.­51
  • n.­562
  • n.­747
  • n.­2324
  • n.­2599
  • n.­3189
  • n.­3192
g.­1733

Suyāma

Wylie:
  • rab ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • suyāma

One of the gods’ realms; also used as the name of the gods living there.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­167
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­18
  • 53.­902
g.­1763

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

A buddha manifesting through the twelve great deeds; the principal deity of a buddha family; one of the group of eight buddhas, starting with Ratnaśikhin; the title used for some deities that emanate from the level of the supreme awakening, such as the eight uṣṇīṣa kings. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “thus-gone.”

Located in 380 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­9
  • i.­15
  • 1.­3-4
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­10-12
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­16-17
  • 1.­21
  • 1.­28
  • 1.­30-32
  • 1.­36-38
  • 1.­46-47
  • 1.­59
  • 1.­68
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­29
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­102
  • 2.­109-110
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­150-151
  • 2.­186
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­6
  • 4.­65-66
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­77-80
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­105
  • 5.­6
  • 6.­5
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­4
  • 8.­5
  • 8.­11
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­3
  • 9.­20
  • 10.­46
  • 10.­58
  • 11.­129
  • 11.­151
  • 11.­272
  • 13.­47
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­4-5
  • 14.­48
  • 14.­105
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­231
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­24
  • 17.­1
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­9
  • 25.­13-14
  • 25.­23-24
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­61
  • 27.­2-6
  • 27.­23
  • 27.­25
  • 27.­27-28
  • 27.­30
  • 27.­35-36
  • 27.­38
  • 27.­40-44
  • 27.­80
  • 28.­1
  • 30.­2
  • 32.­17
  • 32.­32
  • 33.­2
  • 34.­2
  • 35.­1
  • 35.­3-4
  • 35.­123
  • 35.­159
  • 35.­179
  • 36.­14
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­12
  • 37.­14
  • 37.­44
  • 37.­75
  • 37.­77
  • 37.­80
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­90-91
  • 37.­93-94
  • 37.­97
  • 37.­108-109
  • 37.­115
  • 37.­118
  • 37.­123
  • 38.­4
  • 50.­2
  • 51.­76
  • 52.­3
  • 52.­12
  • 52.­19
  • 53.­185
  • 53.­262
  • 53.­314
  • 53.­437
  • 53.­490
  • 53.­500
  • 53.­674
  • 54.­2-6
  • 54.­99-100
  • n.­17
  • n.­122
  • n.­299
  • n.­362
  • n.­458
  • n.­581
  • n.­590
  • n.­861
  • n.­1024
  • n.­1054
  • n.­1287
  • n.­1527
  • n.­1616
  • n.­1618-1620
  • n.­1634
  • n.­1638-1639
  • n.­1651
  • n.­1653
  • n.­1680
  • n.­1804-1805
  • n.­1900
  • n.­2268
  • n.­2372
  • n.­2435
  • n.­2442
  • n.­2453
  • n.­2613
  • n.­2746
  • n.­2748
  • n.­2874
  • n.­3160
  • n.­3311
  • n.­3313
  • n.­4920
  • g.­1
  • g.­4
  • g.­6
  • g.­23
  • g.­24
  • g.­32
  • g.­35
  • g.­36
  • g.­56
  • g.­58
  • g.­65
  • g.­75
  • g.­83
  • g.­84
  • g.­85
  • g.­86
  • g.­88
  • g.­90
  • g.­94
  • g.­103
  • g.­115
  • g.­118
  • g.­119
  • g.­157
  • g.­171
  • g.­192
  • g.­197
  • g.­204
  • g.­214
  • g.­242
  • g.­251
  • g.­280
  • g.­281
  • g.­311
  • g.­319
  • g.­347
  • g.­361
  • g.­373
  • g.­405
  • g.­407
  • g.­408
  • g.­421
  • g.­427
  • g.­438
  • g.­440
  • g.­441
  • g.­444
  • g.­456
  • g.­458
  • g.­459
  • g.­461
  • g.­462
  • g.­463
  • g.­464
  • g.­467
  • g.­480
  • g.­490
  • g.­504
  • g.­520
  • g.­601
  • g.­639
  • g.­640
  • g.­644
  • g.­649
  • g.­650
  • g.­651
  • g.­652
  • g.­653
  • g.­678
  • g.­679
  • g.­683
  • g.­712
  • g.­728
  • g.­729
  • g.­735
  • g.­741
  • g.­743
  • g.­753
  • g.­756
  • g.­775
  • g.­816
  • g.­817
  • g.­834
  • g.­844
  • g.­849
  • g.­857
  • g.­866
  • g.­876
  • g.­897
  • g.­903
  • g.­970
  • g.­1027
  • g.­1039
  • g.­1041
  • g.­1060
  • g.­1109
  • g.­1112
  • g.­1119
  • g.­1121
  • g.­1129
  • g.­1143
  • g.­1162
  • g.­1183
  • g.­1211
  • g.­1212
  • g.­1220
  • g.­1221
  • g.­1222
  • g.­1251
  • g.­1268
  • g.­1286
  • g.­1297
  • g.­1308
  • g.­1311
  • g.­1314
  • g.­1316
  • g.­1322
  • g.­1323
  • g.­1325
  • g.­1326
  • g.­1342
  • g.­1348
  • g.­1356
  • g.­1358
  • g.­1370
  • g.­1391
  • g.­1395
  • g.­1399
  • g.­1412
  • g.­1422
  • g.­1425
  • g.­1427
  • g.­1428
  • g.­1434
  • g.­1466
  • g.­1472
  • g.­1474
  • g.­1475
  • g.­1476
  • g.­1477
  • g.­1481
  • g.­1484
  • g.­1503
  • g.­1507
  • g.­1511
  • g.­1520
  • g.­1541
  • g.­1549
  • g.­1574
  • g.­1587
  • g.­1608
  • g.­1616
  • g.­1624
  • g.­1637
  • g.­1638
  • g.­1658
  • g.­1659
  • g.­1674
  • g.­1675
  • g.­1678
  • g.­1689
  • g.­1693
  • g.­1703
  • g.­1705
  • g.­1708
  • g.­1718
  • g.­1730
  • g.­1736
  • g.­1737
  • g.­1746
  • g.­1748
  • g.­1764
  • g.­1779
  • g.­1784
  • g.­1815
  • g.­1816
  • g.­1833
  • g.­1895
  • g.­1912
  • g.­1913
  • g.­1928
  • g.­1936
  • g.­2010
  • g.­2018
  • g.­2031
  • g.­2066
  • g.­2083
  • g.­2107
  • g.­2108
g.­1780

Tejorāśi

Wylie:
  • gzi brjid phung po’i gtsug tor
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་བརྗིད་ཕུང་པོའི་གཙུག་ཏོར།
Sanskrit:
  • tejorāśi

One of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­43
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­151-152
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22
  • 26.­56
  • 30.­49
  • 37.­12
  • 37.­20
  • 50.­13
  • 53.­359
  • n.­1538
  • n.­1618
  • n.­2276-2277
  • n.­2499
  • n.­4191
g.­1781

ten powers

Wylie:
  • stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśabala

The ten powers of a buddha or bodhisattva; these concern mostly their clairvoyant knowledge.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­68
  • 2.­104-105
  • 4.­72
  • 4.­92
  • 10.­17-18
  • 10.­57-58
  • 11.­17
  • 11.­111
  • 11.­159
  • 11.­175
  • 14.­41
  • 14.­74
  • 15.­91
  • 25.­2
  • n.­355
  • n.­733
  • n.­766
  • n.­841
  • n.­880
  • n.­1051
g.­1782

Three Jewels

Wylie:
  • dkon mchog gsum
Tibetan:
  • དཀོན་མཆོག་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnatraya
  • triratna

The Buddha, the Dharma, and the Saṅgha.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­42
  • 1.­63
  • 1.­74
  • 1.­116
  • 1.­119
  • 2.­42
  • 2.­196
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­178
  • 15.­123
  • 15.­128
  • 27.­28
  • 27.­45
  • 27.­49
  • 27.­59
  • 28.­4-5
  • 30.­43
  • 32.­44
  • 33.­35
  • 33.­125
  • 34.­2
  • 34.­7
  • 37.­125
  • 50.­2
  • 50.­30
  • 51.­27
  • 53.­676
  • n.­2518
  • g.­1438
g.­1783

three vehicles

Wylie:
  • theg pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • triyāna

In the context of the sūtras, the three vehicles are the Śrāvaka, the Pratyeka­buddha, and the Bodhisattva Vehicles.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­29
  • 1.­63
  • 14.­6
  • 17.­4
  • 28.­49
  • 32.­18
  • 35.­231
  • 51.­77
  • 53.­5
  • 53.­55
  • 53.­103
  • 53.­211
  • 53.­297
  • 53.­678
  • 54.­14
  • n.­2178
  • n.­2601
  • n.­2805
  • n.­3323
g.­1784

thus-gone

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

See “tathāgata.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6-7
  • 1.­9-10
  • 2.­152
  • n.­2608
  • g.­1763
g.­1785

Tibet

Wylie:
  • rgya yul
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་ཡུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • cīnadeśa
  • cīna

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • 10.­18
  • 30.­3
  • 53.­509
  • n.­3013
  • g.­623
  • g.­1146
g.­1810

tuft of hair

Wylie:
  • mdzod spu
Tibetan:
  • མཛོད་སྤུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ūrṇā

See “ūrṇā.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­199
  • 14.­2
  • 17.­1
  • 35.­1
  • n.­73
  • g.­1889
g.­1814

Tuṣita

Wylie:
  • dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tuṣita
  • san­tuṣita

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Tuṣita (or sometimes Saṃtuṣita), literally “Joyous” or “Contented,” is one of the six heavens of the desire realm (kāmadhātu). In standard classifications, such as the one in the Abhidharmakośa, it is ranked as the fourth of the six counting from below. This god realm is where all future buddhas are said to dwell before taking on their final rebirth prior to awakening. There, the Buddha Śākyamuni lived his preceding life as the bodhisattva Śvetaketu. When departing to take birth in this world, he appointed the bodhisattva Maitreya, who will be the next buddha of this eon, as his Dharma regent in Tuṣita. For an account of the Buddha’s previous life in Tuṣita, see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 2.12, and for an account of Maitreya’s birth in Tuṣita and a description of this realm, see The Sūtra on Maitreya’s Birth in the Heaven of Joy, (Toh 199).

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­91
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­167
  • 5.­8
  • 26.­18
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­528
  • n.­3035
  • g.­1454
g.­1835

universal emperor

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’ rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

See “cakravartin.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­49
  • 14.­135
  • g.­319
g.­1895

uṣṇīṣa

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར།
Sanskrit:
  • uṣṇīṣa

A protuberance on the head of a buddha; this term may also refer to beings who have this protuberance, known as uṣṇīṣa kings or uṣṇīṣa-tathāgatas.

Located in 65 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­2
  • 17.­36
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­24
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­55
  • 26.­61
  • 27.­43
  • 27.­56
  • 30.­2
  • 30.­36
  • 30.­49
  • 31.­14
  • 31.­19
  • 31.­27
  • 35.­39
  • 35.­215
  • 35.­274
  • 36.­10
  • 37.­3
  • 37.­12
  • 37.­14
  • 37.­18-24
  • 37.­26-28
  • 37.­81
  • 37.­117-118
  • 38.­17
  • 50.­13
  • 52.­131
  • 53.­357
  • n.­71
  • n.­414
  • n.­1351
  • n.­1357
  • n.­1501
  • n.­1606
  • n.­1804
  • n.­2255
  • n.­2272
  • n.­2274-2275
  • n.­2279
  • n.­2288
  • n.­2299
  • n.­2385
  • n.­2445-2446
  • n.­2497
  • n.­2746
  • n.­2919
  • n.­2925
  • g.­319
  • g.­644
  • g.­831
  • g.­975
g.­1897

uṣṇīṣa king

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • uṣṇīṣarāja

A class of fully awakened nonhuman beings, especially the chief eight among them.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­44
  • 2.­145-146
  • 2.­151-152
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­50
  • 26.­56
  • 27.­42
  • 27.­44
  • 30.­4
  • 30.­50
  • 37.­11
  • 37.­14
  • 37.­17
  • 37.­29
  • 37.­115
  • n.­67
  • n.­1357-1358
  • n.­1538
  • n.­1580
  • n.­1607
  • n.­1618
  • n.­1804
  • n.­1836
  • n.­2272
  • n.­2463
  • n.­2497
  • n.­2919
  • n.­2922
  • n.­2924
  • g.­5
  • g.­16
  • g.­109
  • g.­195
  • g.­196
  • g.­205
  • g.­284
  • g.­320
  • g.­539
  • g.­634
  • g.­669
  • g.­670
  • g.­680
  • g.­681
  • g.­870
  • g.­994
  • g.­1396
  • g.­1487
  • g.­1493
  • g.­1523
  • g.­1524
  • g.­1525
  • g.­1763
  • g.­1780
  • g.­1840
  • g.­1895
  • g.­1896
  • g.­2051
  • g.­2058
  • g.­2123
g.­1910

vaipulya

Wylie:
  • shin tu rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaipulya

Literally “extensive”/“elaborate,” it is a denomination applied to a limited number of important sūtras, including the Lalitavistara, the Suvarṇaprabhāsa, and a few others.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­1
g.­1919

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa

Another name of Kubera.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 52.­72
  • 53.­1
  • 53.­50
g.­1921

Vaivasvata

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaivasvata

A vidyārāja from the personal retinue of Vajrapāṇi; also a patronymic of Yama.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­75
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­44
  • 52.­139
  • 52.­146
  • n.­2540
g.­1961

Vajrapāṇi

Wylie:
  • phyag na rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱག་ན་རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapāṇi
  • kuliśapāṇi

A Buddhist deity and a legendary bodhisattva; in the MMK he is regarded as the master of powerful nonhuman beings.

Located in 287 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • i.­9
  • 1.­41
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­54-55
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­110-111
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­144
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­187-188
  • 2.­190
  • 4.­73
  • 5.­5
  • 8.­4-5
  • 11.­195
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­3
  • 16.­12
  • 16.­14
  • 16.­18
  • 26.­5
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­22-23
  • 26.­30-32
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­23
  • 30.­28
  • 31.­49
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­101-102
  • 50.­1
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­23
  • 50.­38
  • 51.­1
  • 52.­1-2
  • 52.­4
  • 52.­13-14
  • 52.­88
  • 52.­141
  • 53.­1
  • 54.­104
  • n.­99
  • n.­467
  • n.­576
  • n.­935
  • n.­1304
  • n.­1308
  • n.­1550
  • n.­1559
  • n.­1561
  • n.­1821
  • n.­1871
  • n.­1895
  • n.­1947
  • n.­2322
  • n.­2425
  • n.­2494
  • n.­2511
  • n.­2523
  • n.­2525
  • n.­2537-2538
  • n.­2594
  • n.­2749
  • n.­2988
  • n.­3305
  • g.­26
  • g.­47
  • g.­48
  • g.­52
  • g.­79
  • g.­81
  • g.­91
  • g.­106
  • g.­127
  • g.­133
  • g.­141
  • g.­156
  • g.­160
  • g.­162
  • g.­190
  • g.­194
  • g.­209
  • g.­215
  • g.­226
  • g.­245
  • g.­269
  • g.­270
  • g.­271
  • g.­274
  • g.­283
  • g.­327
  • g.­369
  • g.­370
  • g.­371
  • g.­410
  • g.­468
  • g.­472
  • g.­476
  • g.­477
  • g.­500
  • g.­532
  • g.­534
  • g.­535
  • g.­550
  • g.­559
  • g.­560
  • g.­562
  • g.­567
  • g.­589
  • g.­590
  • g.­595
  • g.­617
  • g.­630
  • g.­632
  • g.­646
  • g.­657
  • g.­658
  • g.­672
  • g.­675
  • g.­725
  • g.­734
  • g.­764
  • g.­769
  • g.­778
  • g.­789
  • g.­800
  • g.­809
  • g.­864
  • g.­889
  • g.­890
  • g.­896
  • g.­905
  • g.­912
  • g.­914
  • g.­916
  • g.­921
  • g.­932
  • g.­937
  • g.­947
  • g.­959
  • g.­975
  • g.­1003
  • g.­1035
  • g.­1036
  • g.­1058
  • g.­1059
  • g.­1067
  • g.­1108
  • g.­1115
  • g.­1125
  • g.­1141
  • g.­1178
  • g.­1179
  • g.­1185
  • g.­1242
  • g.­1245
  • g.­1260
  • g.­1271
  • g.­1302
  • g.­1317
  • g.­1353
  • g.­1355
  • g.­1381
  • g.­1387
  • g.­1421
  • g.­1462
  • g.­1464
  • g.­1470
  • g.­1480
  • g.­1494
  • g.­1505
  • g.­1509
  • g.­1510
  • g.­1539
  • g.­1552
  • g.­1564
  • g.­1573
  • g.­1588
  • g.­1601
  • g.­1615
  • g.­1619
  • g.­1635
  • g.­1644
  • g.­1647
  • g.­1651
  • g.­1662
  • g.­1663
  • g.­1681
  • g.­1682
  • g.­1691
  • g.­1695
  • g.­1696
  • g.­1699
  • g.­1711
  • g.­1712
  • g.­1726
  • g.­1728
  • g.­1750
  • g.­1761
  • g.­1794
  • g.­1795
  • g.­1796
  • g.­1817
  • g.­1844
  • g.­1859
  • g.­1900
  • g.­1921
  • g.­1925
  • g.­1926
  • g.­1929
  • g.­1930
  • g.­1931
  • g.­1932
  • g.­1933
  • g.­1934
  • g.­1935
  • g.­1937
  • g.­1938
  • g.­1939
  • g.­1940
  • g.­1941
  • g.­1942
  • g.­1943
  • g.­1944
  • g.­1946
  • g.­1947
  • g.­1948
  • g.­1949
  • g.­1950
  • g.­1951
  • g.­1953
  • g.­1955
  • g.­1956
  • g.­1957
  • g.­1958
  • g.­1959
  • g.­1960
  • g.­1962
  • g.­1963
  • g.­1964
  • g.­1965
  • g.­1966
  • g.­1967
  • g.­1968
  • g.­1969
  • g.­1970
  • g.­1971
  • g.­1972
  • g.­1973
  • g.­1975
  • g.­1976
  • g.­1977
  • g.­1978
  • g.­1979
  • g.­1980
  • g.­1981
  • g.­1983
  • g.­1991
  • g.­2034
  • g.­2035
  • g.­2042
  • g.­2045
  • g.­2049
  • g.­2080
  • g.­2087
  • g.­2098
  • g.­2104
  • g.­2133
  • g.­2142
  • g.­2150
  • g.­2159
  • g.­2160
g.­2013

Vaśavartin

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • vaśavartin

One of the gods’ realms; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 53.­1
  • 53.­902
g.­2027

Vemacitri

Wylie:
  • thags bzang ris
Tibetan:
  • ཐགས་བཟང་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • vemacitri

One of the kings of the asuras.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­92
  • 53.­909
  • 54.­69
  • n.­3300
g.­2029

vetāḍa

Wylie:
  • ro langs
Tibetan:
  • རོ་ལངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vetāḍa
  • vetāla

A class of demons inhabiting charnel grounds.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75
  • 9.­13
  • 26.­20-21
  • 53.­891
  • 54.­16
  • 54.­38
  • n.­6753
g.­2037

vidyā

Wylie:
  • rig pa
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyā

Magical spell; knowledge of spells; a class of male or female deities identified with their spells.

Located in 144 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­116-118
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­49-67
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­142
  • 2.­144
  • 2.­199-200
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­4
  • 8.­5-6
  • 9.­20
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­1
  • 13.­1
  • 14.­1-4
  • 14.­7
  • 14.­139
  • 15.­2-3
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­26
  • 26.­7
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­25
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­45-47
  • 26.­55-56
  • 27.­3
  • 32.­2
  • 35.­215
  • 37.­25
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­66
  • 37.­70-72
  • 37.­79
  • 37.­99-100
  • 37.­102
  • 50.­15
  • 50.­19
  • 50.­25
  • 51.­24
  • 52.­19
  • 52.­40
  • 52.­52
  • 52.­64
  • 52.­71
  • 52.­107
  • 52.­130-131
  • 52.­135
  • 53.­450
  • 53.­453-454
  • 53.­502
  • 53.­508
  • 53.­517
  • 53.­521
  • 53.­563
  • 54.­38
  • 54.­99
  • n.­267
  • n.­379
  • n.­420
  • n.­626
  • n.­685
  • n.­721
  • n.­777
  • n.­935
  • n.­1045
  • n.­1049
  • n.­1261
  • n.­1268
  • n.­1281
  • n.­1505
  • n.­1585
  • n.­1691
  • n.­1805
  • n.­1877
  • n.­2345
  • n.­2420
  • n.­2512
  • n.­2730
  • n.­2753
  • n.­2927
  • n.­2978
  • n.­3032
  • n.­3188
  • n.­3289
  • n.­3381
  • g.­53
  • g.­595
  • g.­688
  • g.­726
  • g.­864
  • g.­906
  • g.­933
  • g.­938
  • g.­939
  • g.­1082
  • g.­1389
  • g.­1760
  • g.­1857
  • g.­1996
  • g.­2039
  • g.­2042
  • g.­2043
g.­2038

vidyā king

Wylie:
  • rig pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyārāja

See “vidyārāja.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­3
  • 54.­101
  • n.­2927
g.­2039

vidyādhara

Wylie:
  • rig ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རིག་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyādhara

One possessed of vidyā; this could refer to any being who is an adept of magical lore, but in particular to the class of semidivine, nonhuman beings of the same name. The term is rendered elsewhere in this translation as “knowledge holder” or “adept of vidyās.”

Located in 69 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 9.­18-19
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­55
  • 10.­58
  • 13.­52
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­96
  • 14.­100
  • 14.­129
  • 14.­135
  • 26.­6-7
  • 26.­13-14
  • 26.­18-20
  • 26.­23-24
  • 26.­30-32
  • 26.­35-36
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­48
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­54
  • 26.­58
  • 28.­3
  • 28.­25
  • 28.­38
  • 28.­40-41
  • 29.­7
  • 29.­11
  • 29.­15
  • 31.­35
  • 37.­35
  • 37.­60
  • 52.­97
  • 53.­126
  • 53.­765-766
  • 53.­908
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­34
  • 54.­47
  • 54.­104
  • n.­247
  • n.­709
  • n.­1307
  • n.­1543-1544
  • n.­1561
  • n.­1804
  • n.­2351
  • n.­3190
  • n.­3299
  • g.­30
  • g.­352
  • g.­752
  • g.­1502
  • g.­2041
g.­2042

vidyārāja

Wylie:
  • rig pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyārāja

“Vidyā king,” a class of mantras and mantra deities; an epithet of Vajrapāṇi; an epithet of any powerful vidyā or mantra.

Located in 198 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­42
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­54
  • 2.­142
  • 2.­144
  • 9.­1-2
  • 9.­4
  • 9.­20
  • 11.­245
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­3
  • 14.­6-8
  • 14.­73
  • 14.­153-154
  • 15.­2
  • 25.­5
  • 26.­33
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­14
  • 30.­2
  • 35.­168
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­58
  • 37.­68
  • 50.­24
  • 53.­357
  • 53.­366
  • 53.­512
  • 54.­99
  • n.­68
  • n.­88
  • n.­98-99
  • n.­935
  • n.­1261
  • n.­1618
  • n.­2124
  • n.­2342
  • n.­2344
  • n.­2512
  • n.­2927
  • n.­3386
  • g.­19
  • g.­47
  • g.­48
  • g.­79
  • g.­89
  • g.­91
  • g.­102
  • g.­106
  • g.­127
  • g.­156
  • g.­162
  • g.­184
  • g.­194
  • g.­200
  • g.­209
  • g.­215
  • g.­226
  • g.­245
  • g.­269
  • g.­274
  • g.­283
  • g.­340
  • g.­366
  • g.­369
  • g.­370
  • g.­468
  • g.­474
  • g.­477
  • g.­500
  • g.­534
  • g.­535
  • g.­550
  • g.­574
  • g.­614
  • g.­617
  • g.­646
  • g.­657
  • g.­658
  • g.­667
  • g.­668
  • g.­720
  • g.­764
  • g.­769
  • g.­778
  • g.­800
  • g.­809
  • g.­842
  • g.­889
  • g.­890
  • g.­905
  • g.­912
  • g.­921
  • g.­932
  • g.­937
  • g.­947
  • g.­959
  • g.­978
  • g.­980
  • g.­1007
  • g.­1035
  • g.­1067
  • g.­1079
  • g.­1080
  • g.­1115
  • g.­1116
  • g.­1117
  • g.­1141
  • g.­1185
  • g.­1233
  • g.­1242
  • g.­1245
  • g.­1302
  • g.­1317
  • g.­1362
  • g.­1372
  • g.­1381
  • g.­1421
  • g.­1462
  • g.­1470
  • g.­1480
  • g.­1495
  • g.­1539
  • g.­1573
  • g.­1601
  • g.­1617
  • g.­1619
  • g.­1622
  • g.­1633
  • g.­1634
  • g.­1644
  • g.­1647
  • g.­1662
  • g.­1691
  • g.­1695
  • g.­1696
  • g.­1711
  • g.­1712
  • g.­1726
  • g.­1728
  • g.­1747
  • g.­1750
  • g.­1795
  • g.­1817
  • g.­1844
  • g.­1859
  • g.­1900
  • g.­1921
  • g.­1929
  • g.­1930
  • g.­1933
  • g.­1934
  • g.­1935
  • g.­1938
  • g.­1939
  • g.­1940
  • g.­1943
  • g.­1944
  • g.­1946
  • g.­1951
  • g.­1953
  • g.­1955
  • g.­1956
  • g.­1957
  • g.­1959
  • g.­1960
  • g.­1962
  • g.­1963
  • g.­1964
  • g.­1965
  • g.­1967
  • g.­1969
  • g.­1971
  • g.­1973
  • g.­1975
  • g.­1976
  • g.­1977
  • g.­1980
  • g.­1983
  • g.­2034
  • g.­2035
  • g.­2043
  • g.­2045
  • g.­2057
  • g.­2061
  • g.­2080
  • g.­2098
  • g.­2126
  • g.­2133
  • g.­2159
  • g.­2160
g.­2046

vighna

Wylie:
  • bar chad
Tibetan:
  • བར་ཆད།
Sanskrit:
  • vighna

A class of spirits that cause obstacles (the word vighna means “obstacle”).

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 31.­55
  • 35.­71
  • 35.­75
  • 35.­78
  • 35.­201
  • 37.­6
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­76
  • 37.­83
  • 37.­90
  • 52.­23
  • 53.­34
  • 53.­470-471
  • 53.­474-476
  • 54.­102
  • n.­1180
  • n.­2631
  • n.­2774
  • n.­2989
  • n.­2992
  • n.­2995
g.­2078

vināyaka

Wylie:
  • log ’dren
Tibetan:
  • ལོག་འདྲེན།
Sanskrit:
  • vināyaka

“Remover [of obstacles],” a class of semidivine beings; also a class of demons who create obstacles.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­102
  • 15.­104-105
  • 26.­40
  • 26.­44
  • 28.­6
  • 28.­37
  • 30.­16
  • 37.­9
  • 37.­21
  • 37.­24
  • 37.­42
  • 37.­120
  • 54.­102
  • n.­1577
  • n.­1816
  • g.­1984
g.­2081

Vindhya

Wylie:
  • ’bigs byed
Tibetan:
  • འབིགས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vindhya

A low mountain range in central India.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­10
  • 24.­133
  • 30.­14
  • 31.­54
  • 53.­575
  • 53.­577
  • 53.­751
  • 53.­757
  • n.­563
  • n.­3348
  • g.­883
  • g.­1174
g.­2125

wheel-turning monarch

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’ rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

See “cakravartin.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­115
  • 14.­130
  • 28.­38
  • 30.­51
  • n.­1093
  • n.­1836
  • g.­319
g.­2128

Yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 167 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­33
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­47
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­75-76
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­158-159
  • 2.­161
  • 2.­169
  • 2.­171
  • 2.­209
  • 10.­6
  • 11.­127
  • 11.­263
  • 12.­14
  • 13.­51
  • 14.­75
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­86
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­3
  • 16.­10
  • 16.­12
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­30
  • 26.­12-13
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­28-30
  • 26.­44
  • 30.­9
  • 30.­26
  • 30.­28
  • 30.­33
  • 31.­2
  • 31.­32
  • 31.­53
  • 32.­36
  • 32.­38
  • 33.­42
  • 37.­32
  • 37.­34
  • 37.­39
  • 37.­46
  • 37.­60
  • 37.­72
  • 37.­74
  • 37.­101
  • 37.­107
  • 38.­20
  • 38.­28
  • 50.­1
  • 50.­3
  • 50.­8
  • 50.­10
  • 50.­28
  • 50.­34
  • 50.­38
  • 51.­73-74
  • 52.­1
  • 52.­13
  • 52.­25
  • 52.­42
  • 52.­47
  • 52.­113
  • 52.­115
  • 52.­132
  • 53.­17
  • 53.­50-51
  • 53.­97
  • 53.­118
  • 53.­184
  • 53.­233
  • 53.­337-338
  • 53.­342
  • 53.­344
  • 53.­346
  • 53.­356
  • 53.­364
  • 53.­407
  • 53.­457
  • 53.­459
  • 53.­531
  • 53.­773
  • 53.­822-823
  • 53.­825
  • 53.­901
  • 54.­2
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­48
  • 54.­104
  • n.­441
  • n.­496
  • n.­725
  • n.­1303
  • n.­1515
  • n.­1561
  • n.­1824
  • n.­1862
  • n.­1871
  • n.­1873
  • n.­1895
  • n.­1947
  • n.­2086
  • n.­2322-2323
  • n.­2328
  • n.­2351
  • n.­2467
  • n.­2596
  • n.­2598
  • n.­2658
  • n.­2726
  • n.­2749
  • n.­2913
  • n.­2916
  • n.­2934
  • n.­2980-2981
  • n.­3027
  • n.­3295
  • n.­3312
  • g.­159
  • g.­321
  • g.­337
  • g.­497
  • g.­555
  • g.­563
  • g.­564
  • g.­578
  • g.­580
  • g.­582
  • g.­583
  • g.­593
  • g.­616
  • g.­702
  • g.­786
  • g.­807
  • g.­819
  • g.­865
  • g.­899
  • g.­969
  • g.­991
  • g.­1161
  • g.­1198
  • g.­1259
  • g.­1276
  • g.­1359
  • g.­1488
  • g.­1567
  • g.­1885
  • g.­2030
  • g.­2074
  • g.­2075
  • g.­2132
g.­2133

Yama

Wylie:
  • gshin rje
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • yama

The god of death who rules over the realm of the pretas; a vidyārāja from the personal retinue of Vajrapāṇi; one of the kings of rākṣasas.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 1.­72
  • 1.­75
  • 1.­77
  • 2.­162
  • 2.­169
  • 6.­11
  • 11.­237
  • 30.­22
  • 37.­74
  • 51.­16
  • 52.­138
  • 52.­147
  • 53.­426-427
  • 53.­672
  • 53.­907
  • 54.­4
  • 54.­71
  • 54.­101
  • n.­1817-1818
  • n.­2353
  • n.­2540
  • n.­3294
  • n.­3387
  • g.­1921
  • g.­2137
g.­2136

Yamāntaka

Wylie:
  • gshin rje’i gshed
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེའི་གཤེད།
Sanskrit:
  • yamāntaka

Wrathful aspect of Mañjuśrī; also the namesake mantra.

Located in 58 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­72
  • 1.­74
  • 1.­109-110
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­122
  • 2.­138-139
  • 2.­148-149
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­88
  • 5.­9
  • 6.­4
  • 35.­81
  • 35.­161
  • 50.­2-3
  • 50.­17
  • 50.­32
  • 50.­53
  • 51.­2
  • 51.­11
  • 51.­51
  • 51.­56
  • 51.­80
  • 52.­8
  • 52.­115-116
  • 52.­129
  • 52.­138
  • 52.­147-149
  • 53.­419
  • 53.­885
  • n.­88
  • n.­377
  • n.­2503-2504
  • n.­2509
  • n.­2520
  • n.­2525
  • n.­2528
  • n.­2619
  • n.­2744
  • n.­2752
  • n.­2755
  • n.­2758
  • n.­2959
  • n.­3284
  • n.­6046
  • g.­556
  • g.­765
  • g.­875
  • g.­905
  • g.­1136
0
    You are downloading:

    The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud, Toh 543). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh543/UT22084-088-038-chapter-37.Copy
    84000. The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud, Toh 543). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh543/UT22084-088-038-chapter-37.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud, Toh 543). (Dharmachakra Translation Committee, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh543/UT22084-088-038-chapter-37.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Action tantras
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy